1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
190 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
194 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
216 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
220 \begin_inset Note Note
223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
224 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
225 \begin_inset Newline newline
230 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
238 \begin_layout Standard
239 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
240 LatexCommand tableofcontents
247 \begin_layout Chapter
251 \begin_layout Section
252 What is \SpecialChar LyX
256 \begin_layout Standard
258 is a document preparation system.
259 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
260 scripts, publishable books, business
261 letters and proposals,
262 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
266 It is unlike most other
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
274 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
276 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 pt type, left justified, 5
293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
312 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
316 \begin_layout Standard
321 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
322 's philosophy: most importantly,
323 the format of all of the manuals.
324 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
325 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
326 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
329 \begin_layout Section
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
336 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
338 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
339 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
345 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
346 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
348 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
349 only a vertical scrollbar.
352 \begin_layout Standard
353 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
354 The first case is large images.
355 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
356 the image and use the option
367 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
370 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
373 \begin_layout Standard
374 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
375 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
383 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
390 \begin_layout Section
394 \begin_layout Standard
395 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
397 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
399 Just select the manual you want to read from the
406 \begin_layout Section
407 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
411 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
418 \begin_layout Standard
419 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
420 can be configured via the menu
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
438 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
439 packages are available.
440 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
442 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
443 was installed on your system,
444 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
449 \begin_inset space \space{}
452 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
455 To force \SpecialChar LyX
456 to re-inspect your system use
458 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
462 \begin_inset Index idx
465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
466 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
472 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
473 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
476 \begin_layout Section
479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
481 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
488 \begin_layout Standard
489 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
490 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
491 installed but you will not be
493 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
494 or print your documents
498 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
499 Some \SpecialChar LyX
500 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
509 which can produce PDFs and the like.
512 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
514 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
517 every \SpecialChar LyX
518 document can still be output as plain text
519 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
525 \begin_layout Standard
526 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
528 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
532 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
533 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
536 \begin_layout Standard
537 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
539 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
542 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
550 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
551 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
558 \begin_inset Index idx
561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
562 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
570 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
577 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
581 \begin_layout Chapter
582 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
586 \begin_layout Section
587 Basic File Operations
588 \begin_inset Index idx
591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
600 \begin_layout Standard
605 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
606 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
609 \begin_layout Itemize
631 \begin_layout Itemize
647 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
653 \begin_layout Itemize
675 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
687 \begin_layout Itemize
689 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
701 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
717 \begin_layout Itemize
719 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
727 \begin_layout Itemize
749 \begin_layout Itemize
761 arg "buffer-write-as"
765 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
769 \begin_layout Itemize
771 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
783 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
787 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
797 \begin_layout Itemize
811 \begin_layout Itemize
825 \begin_layout Standard
826 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
827 few minor differences.
830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
841 command lists the available templates.
842 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
843 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
844 and possibly propose text fragments
846 for the document, features
847 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
850 you would otherwise need to
851 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
857 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
861 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
869 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
876 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
880 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
888 \begin_layout Standard
889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
921 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
922 to open a file or create a new one, that big
923 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
927 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
931 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
942 \begin_layout Standard
964 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
966 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
969 people work on the same document at the same time.
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
974 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
977 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
982 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
983 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
987 \begin_inset Flex Emph
990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1002 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1007 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1015 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1035 will reload the document from disk.
1036 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1037 and want to restore it to the last save
1038 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1045 \begin_inset space ~
1050 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1051 them as your changes.
1054 \begin_layout Section
1055 Basic Editing Features
1056 \begin_inset Index idx
1059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1068 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1075 \begin_layout Standard
1076 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1077 can perform cut and paste operations
1078 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1079 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1080 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1081 editing features and how to access
1083 We will start with cut and paste.
1086 \begin_layout Standard
1087 As you might expect, the
1091 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1092 various other editing features.
1093 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1097 \begin_layout Itemize
1103 \begin_inset Index idx
1106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1135 \begin_layout Itemize
1141 \begin_inset Index idx
1144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1173 \begin_layout Itemize
1179 \begin_inset Index idx
1182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1207 \begin_layout Itemize
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1217 \begin_layout Itemize
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_layout Itemize
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_inset Index idx
1244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1253 \begin_inset Index idx
1256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1281 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1287 \begin_layout Standard
1288 The first three are self-explanatory.
1289 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1290 and other programs using
1311 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1312 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1317 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1318 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1319 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1320 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1321 into individual cells.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1331 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1335 \begin_layout Standard
1339 \begin_inset space ~
1344 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1346 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1361 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1362 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1363 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1369 \begin_inset space \space{}
1372 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1373 text which is often meaningless.)
1376 \begin_layout Standard
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1383 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1402 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1403 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1404 is inserted as one paragraph.
1405 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1409 \begin_inset space ~
1414 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1415 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1421 \begin_inset space ~
1424 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1430 \begin_inset space ~
1438 \begin_inset space ~
1441 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1444 paste from the primary selection.
1445 This is normally the currently selected text.
1448 \begin_layout Standard
1451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1453 \begin_inset space ~
1457 \begin_inset space ~
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1477 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1481 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1484 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1489 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1492 \begin_inset space ~
1503 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1505 \begin_inset space ~
1509 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1511 \begin_inset space ~
1519 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1533 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1537 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1541 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1545 \begin_inset space ~
1557 arg "word-find-backward"
1560 shortcut) to search backwards
1564 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1565 Even if you close the widget,
1574 arg "word-find-backward"
1577 will search further.
1582 \begin_layout Standard
1584 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1589 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1592 \begin_inset space ~
1597 field and searches the next match.
1603 \begin_inset space ~
1608 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1610 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1612 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1616 \begin_layout Standard
1618 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1619 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1622 \begin_layout Itemize
1625 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1631 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1640 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1641 If the toggle is set, searching for
1642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1653 will not match the word
1654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1667 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1678 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1682 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1687 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1688 to only find complete words, e.
1689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1722 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1726 \begin_layout Itemize
1729 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1734 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1737 \begin_layout Itemize
1740 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1745 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1749 \begin_inset space ~
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1764 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1765 been reached without asking.
1766 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1767 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1768 so you need to put it back manually.
1771 \begin_layout Standard
1772 \paragraph_spacing single
1774 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1775 The widget also has a
1779 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1780 widget), hiding replace and options.
1782 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1784 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1789 button brings you back to the full size.
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1793 \paragraph_spacing single
1796 also offers an advanced
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1808 feature that is described in section
1809 \begin_inset space ~
1813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1815 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1822 \begin_layout Standard
1823 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1824 \begin_inset space \space{}
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1836 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1838 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1843 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1850 \begin_layout Standard
1854 arg "inset-select-all"
1857 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1858 When the cursor is inside an inset
1861 arg "inset-select-all"
1864 selects the content of the inset.
1868 arg "inset-select-all"
1871 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1872 then to the whole document.
1876 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1879 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1883 \begin_layout Section
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1895 \begin_inset Index idx
1898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1907 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1915 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1917 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1923 or the toolbar button
1930 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1932 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1935 or the toolbar button
1942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1949 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1953 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1956 \begin_layout Standard
1958 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1959 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1968 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1969 This is a consequence of the 100
1970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1973 step undo limit mentioned above.
1976 \begin_layout Standard
1985 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1987 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1991 \begin_layout Section
1993 \begin_inset Index idx
1996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2005 \begin_layout Standard
2006 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2009 \begin_layout Enumerate
2014 \begin_layout Itemize
2019 once anywhere in the edit window.
2020 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2024 \begin_layout Enumerate
2029 \begin_layout Itemize
2036 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2039 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2042 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2043 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2045 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2046 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2052 \begin_layout Itemize
2053 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2063 \begin_layout Enumerate
2064 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2068 \begin_layout Standard
2069 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2070 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2074 \begin_layout Section
2076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2078 name "sec:Navigating"
2083 \begin_inset Index idx
2086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 \begin_layout Standard
2097 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2100 \begin_layout Itemize
2105 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2106 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2109 \begin_layout Itemize
2110 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2112 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2114 \begin_inset space ~
2119 or by the toolbar button
2122 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2128 \begin_layout Itemize
2129 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2131 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2134 and use the same menu to return to them.
2135 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2138 \begin_layout Standard
2142 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2147 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2148 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2150 \begin_inset space ~
2155 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2156 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2157 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2158 last editing position.
2161 \begin_layout Standard
2166 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2170 \begin_layout Subsection
2172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2174 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2179 \begin_inset Index idx
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2183 Navigating ! Outline
2189 \begin_inset Index idx
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_layout Standard
2202 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2203 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2204 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2211 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2215 ), notes, or citations (see section
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2222 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2227 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2231 \begin_layout Standard
2232 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2233 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2234 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2235 dialog and to modify the citation.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2243 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2244 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2246 Labels and References
2248 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2257 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2260 \begin_layout Standard
2261 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2262 control the display.
2267 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2268 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2273 option keeps it in the current view state.
2274 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2275 \begin_inset space ~
2278 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2279 \begin_inset space ~
2282 3, the subsections of sections
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2286 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2291 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2292 \begin_inset space ~
2296 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2306 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2309 \begin_layout Standard
2316 button refreshes the TOC (
2317 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2319 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2323 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2325 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2329 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2333 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2337 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2341 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2343 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2347 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2349 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2353 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2355 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2359 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2363 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2365 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2369 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2373 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2377 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2381 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2385 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2389 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2393 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2397 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2399 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2403 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2417 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2418 For example, you can move section
2419 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2426 2.4 or after section
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2432 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2445 (or the corresponding key bindings
2453 ) you can change the level of sections.
2454 You can make section
2455 \begin_inset space ~
2459 \begin_inset space ~
2463 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_layout Standard
2470 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2471 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2474 \begin_layout Subsection
2475 Horizontal Scrolling
2476 \begin_inset Index idx
2479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2480 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2488 \begin_layout Standard
2490 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2492 \begin_inset space ~
2495 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2496 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2497 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2501 \begin_layout Standard
2502 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2506 \begin_layout Itemize
2508 is used on a small tablet computer
2511 \begin_layout Itemize
2512 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2524 \begin_inset space ~
2537 \begin_layout Itemize
2538 Math constructs with long command names
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2543 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2545 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2546 window so that table
2547 \begin_inset space ~
2551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2553 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2558 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2560 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2561 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 \begin_inset Float table
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2573 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2578 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2582 Horizontal scrolling test.
2590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2592 \begin_inset Tabular
2593 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2594 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2597 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2639 \begin_layout Section
2640 Input/Word Completion
2641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2643 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2694 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2696 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2697 is used to propose completions.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2701 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2709 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2716 \begin_inset space ~
2720 \begin_inset space ~
2725 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2734 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2735 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2739 \begin_inset space ~
2745 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2746 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2747 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2748 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2751 \begin_layout Standard
2753 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2754 completions available.
2759 key to accept a proposed completion.
2760 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2761 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2762 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2765 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2774 ing options for text.
2776 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2778 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2780 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2783 he special math option
2787 enables characters to be composed.
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2795 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2798 you want to insert the character
2799 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2803 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2806 input the characters
2807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2832 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2834 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2837 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2840 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2842 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2845 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2850 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2852 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2856 's installation folder.
2858 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2859 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2866 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2871 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2872 In the example above,
2877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2909 \begin_layout Section
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 \begin_inset Index idx
2924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2953 \begin_inset Index idx
2956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 \begin_layout Standard
2988 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3002 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3005 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3009 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3016 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3023 \begin_layout Standard
3027 \begin_inset space ~
3035 \begin_inset space ~
3056 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3060 \begin_layout Labeling
3061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3065 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3066 LatexCommand nomenclature
3068 description "Tabulator key"
3075 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3077 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3078 \begin_inset space ~
3082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3084 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3091 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3095 , especially section
3096 \begin_inset space ~
3100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3102 reference "subsec:Lists"
3108 If you are still confused, look in the
3113 \begin_inset Newline newline
3121 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3122 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3126 \begin_layout Labeling
3127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3132 LatexCommand nomenclature
3134 description "Escape key"
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3150 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3153 \begin_layout Labeling
3154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3159 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3160 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3164 \begin_layout Standard
3165 There are three modifier keys:
3168 \begin_layout Labeling
3169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3187 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3188 LatexCommand nomenclature
3190 description "Control key"
3195 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3196 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3200 \begin_layout Itemize
3209 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3212 \begin_layout Itemize
3221 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3224 \begin_layout Itemize
3233 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3237 \begin_layout Labeling
3238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3256 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3257 LatexCommand nomenclature
3259 description "Shift key"
3264 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3265 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3268 \begin_layout Labeling
3269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3287 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3288 LatexCommand nomenclature
3290 description "Alt or Meta key"
3295 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3296 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3297 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3303 \begin_inset Newline newline
3306 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3308 menu accelerator keys
3311 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3312 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 For example, the sequence
3318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3324 \begin_inset space ~
3328 \begin_inset space ~
3334 \begin_inset space ~
3342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3361 \begin_inset space ~
3367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 \begin_layout Standard
3382 manual lists all other things bound to the
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3393 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3395 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3396 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3398 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3399 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3400 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3402 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3418 followed by a capital
3425 \begin_layout Chapter
3428 \begin_inset Index idx
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 \begin_layout Section
3443 \begin_inset Index idx
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 \begin_layout Subsection
3459 \begin_layout Standard
3460 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3461 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3462 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3463 numbering schemes, and so on.
3464 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3465 and format the title of your document differently.
3468 \begin_layout Standard
3473 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3474 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3475 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3476 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3477 picks one for you by default.
3478 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3481 \begin_layout Subsection
3483 \begin_inset Index idx
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3495 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3502 \begin_layout Standard
3503 You can select a class using the
3505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3506 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3510 \begin_inset Index idx
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3528 \begin_layout Standard
3529 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3534 \begin_layout Description
3535 Article for basic articles
3538 \begin_layout Description
3539 Report for basic reports
3542 \begin_layout Description
3543 Book for writing a book
3546 \begin_layout Description
3547 Letter for US-style letters
3550 \begin_layout Standard
3551 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3552 only uses if you have installed
3553 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3554 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3555 distributions will include
3557 Here are some of the classes.
3558 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3560 Special Document Classes
3569 \begin_layout Description
3570 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3573 \begin_layout Description
3574 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3578 \begin_layout Description
3579 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3583 \begin_layout Description
3584 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3585 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3586 There are three article layouts available.
3587 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3588 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3589 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3590 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3595 sequential numbering
3596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3599 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3600 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3601 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3602 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3605 \begin_layout Description
3606 Beamer Layout for presentations
3609 \begin_layout Description
3610 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3611 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3612 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3613 with \SpecialChar LyX
3617 \begin_layout Description
3618 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3621 \begin_layout Description
3623 \begin_inset space ~
3626 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3629 \begin_layout Description
3630 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3633 \begin_layout Description
3634 Foils Used to make transparencies
3637 \begin_layout Description
3638 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3639 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3640 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3641 with \SpecialChar LyX
3645 \begin_layout Description
3646 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3647 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3650 \begin_layout Description
3651 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3654 \begin_layout Description
3655 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3658 \begin_layout Description
3659 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3660 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3661 (Is used by this document.)
3664 \begin_layout Description
3665 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3668 \begin_layout Description
3669 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3672 \begin_layout Description
3677 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3678 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3680 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3684 \begin_layout Description
3685 Slides Used to make transparencies
3688 \begin_layout Description
3690 \begin_inset space ~
3693 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3694 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3697 \begin_layout Description
3698 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3701 \begin_layout Standard
3702 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3704 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3706 Special Document Classes
3713 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3714 of the document classes.
3717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3721 \begin_layout Standard
3722 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3727 \begin_inset Index idx
3730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3747 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3748 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3750 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3753 \begin_layout Standard
3756 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3761 , are highly specialized.
3763 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3764 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3765 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3767 by some document class.
3768 There are just too many of them.
3769 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3772 \begin_layout Standard
3773 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3781 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3782 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3783 document class for a new file.
3785 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3788 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3795 manual for information on how to install them.
3796 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3802 \begin_layout Standard
3803 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3804 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3805 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3806 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3807 class files to be used for dissertation
3808 s submitted to those universities.
3809 The \SpecialChar LyX
3810 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3812 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3816 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3822 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3829 name "subsec:Modules"
3834 \begin_inset Index idx
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 \begin_layout Standard
3847 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3848 chosen document class.
3849 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3850 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3871 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3877 packages or file format converters that are not always
3878 installed by default.
3880 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3881 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3882 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3883 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3885 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3886 file without the missing prerequisites.
3887 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3888 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3895 \begin_inset Index idx
3898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3906 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3910 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3914 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3923 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3925 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3936 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3939 \begin_layout Standard
3940 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3950 will advise you about these things.
3958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3962 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3967 \begin_inset Index idx
3970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3971 Document ! Local Layout
3979 \begin_layout Standard
3980 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3981 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3982 : They are intended to be used in
3983 a variety of different documents.
3984 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3985 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3986 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3987 need a specific inset or
3988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3990 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3993 style only that one time.
3994 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3996 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4014 manual for information on how to use it.
4017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4021 \begin_layout Standard
4022 Each class has a default set of options.
4023 Here's a quick table describing them:
4026 \begin_layout Standard
4027 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4033 \begin_layout Standard
4035 \begin_inset Tabular
4036 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4037 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4496 \begin_layout Standard
4497 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4503 \begin_layout Standard
4504 You're probably also wondering what
4505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4509 \begin_inset space ~
4513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4517 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4518 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4523 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4528 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4538 headings, there are also
4546 headings, and so on.
4547 We will describe these headings fully in section
4548 \begin_inset space ~
4552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4554 reference "subsec:Headings"
4561 \begin_layout Subsection
4563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4565 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4570 \begin_inset Index idx
4573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4580 \begin_inset Index idx
4583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4592 \begin_layout Standard
4593 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4615 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4617 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4618 doesn't support special options you want to
4619 use for your document.
4620 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4621 -class and its options, you have to read
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4627 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4635 \begin_inset space ~
4642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4648 \begin_inset space ~
4653 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4654 You can choose between the following five options:
4657 \begin_layout Labeling
4658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4663 Use default page style of current class.
4666 \begin_layout Labeling
4667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4672 No page numbers or headings.
4675 \begin_layout Labeling
4676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4684 \begin_layout Labeling
4685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4690 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4691 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4692 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4693 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4696 \begin_layout Labeling
4697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4702 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4703 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4709 \begin_inset Index idx
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4720 How they are defined is explained in section
4721 \begin_inset space ~
4725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4727 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4735 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4736 \begin_inset space ~
4740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4742 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4749 \begin_layout Subsection
4750 Paper Size and Orientation
4751 \begin_inset Index idx
4754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 Document ! Paper size
4761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4763 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4770 \begin_layout Standard
4771 You can find the following options in the menu
4774 \begin_inset space ~
4781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 \begin_inset Index idx
4788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4797 \begin_layout Labeling
4798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4802 \begin_inset space ~
4807 What size paper to print on.
4812 \begin_layout Itemize
4818 \begin_layout Itemize
4824 \begin_layout Itemize
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 \begin_layout Itemize
4839 US letter, US legal, US executive
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 \begin_layout Itemize
4855 \begin_layout Labeling
4856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4861 To choose whether to output as
4872 \begin_layout Labeling
4873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4877 \begin_inset space ~
4882 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4883 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4886 \begin_layout Subsection
4888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4890 name "subsec:Margins"
4895 \begin_inset Index idx
4898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4905 \begin_inset Index idx
4908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4917 \begin_layout Standard
4918 Paper margins are set in the menu
4920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4924 \begin_inset Index idx
4927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4936 \begin_layout Standard
4937 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4938 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4939 the paper format and the font size into account.
4942 \begin_layout Subsection
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4947 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4948 has to convert everything into the new
4950 That includes the paragraph environments.
4951 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4952 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4953 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4955 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4964 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4966 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4967 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4968 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4971 \begin_layout Section
4972 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4973 \begin_inset Index idx
4976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4977 Paragraph ! Indentation
4985 \begin_layout Subsection
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4998 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5003 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5004 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5005 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5009 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5015 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5016 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5017 language than English.
5019 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5024 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5025 into \SpecialChar LyX
5027 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5030 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5032 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5033 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5034 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5041 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5042 goes to produce a printable file.
5047 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5049 gives you the ability globally to change
5053 these pre-coded spacings.
5054 We will explain more later.
5057 \begin_layout Subsection
5058 Paragraph Separation
5059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5061 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5066 \begin_inset Index idx
5069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5070 Paragraph ! Separation
5078 \begin_layout Standard
5086 \begin_inset space ~
5094 \begin_inset space ~
5101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5105 \begin_inset Index idx
5108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5114 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5117 \begin_layout Subsection
5121 \begin_layout Standard
5122 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5125 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5127 \begin_inset space ~
5132 dialog and toggle the
5135 \begin_inset space ~
5140 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5143 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5147 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5148 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5154 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5157 \begin_layout Subsection
5159 \begin_inset Index idx
5162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5190 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5194 \begin_inset space ~
5203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5204 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5210 \begin_inset Index idx
5213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5220 installed to use this feature.
5225 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5227 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5229 \begin_inset space ~
5234 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5235 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5238 \begin_layout Section
5239 Paragraph Environments
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5247 \begin_inset Index idx
5250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 Paragraph ! Environments
5257 \begin_inset Index idx
5260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5261 Paragraph environments|(
5269 \begin_layout Subsection
5273 \begin_layout Standard
5274 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5277 \begin_layout Standard
5286 } \SpecialChar ldots
5296 \begin_inset Newline newline
5299 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5301 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5302 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5303 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5312 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 A paragraph environment is simply a
5317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5324 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5325 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5326 scheme, labels, and so on.
5327 Additionally, you can
5328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5335 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5336 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5337 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5338 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5340 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5342 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5346 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5347 \begin_inset Graphics
5348 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5354 at the left end of the toolbar.
5356 will change the environment of the
5360 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5361 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5362 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5374 create a new paragraph using the
5378 paragraph environment.
5380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 because if you are in one of these environments:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5426 \begin_layout Itemize
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5434 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5438 , rather than resetting it to
5443 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5444 \begin_inset space ~
5448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5450 reference "sec:Nesting"
5457 \begin_layout Subsection
5461 \begin_layout Standard
5462 The default paragraph environment is
5467 It creates a plain paragraph.
5469 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5470 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5471 this manual) are in the
5478 \begin_layout Standard
5479 You can nest a paragraph using the
5483 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5491 \begin_layout Subsection
5493 \begin_inset Index idx
5496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5505 \begin_layout Standard
5506 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5507 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5516 for thanks or contact information.
5517 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5518 places all of this on a separate page
5519 along with today's date.
5520 For other types of documents, the title
5521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5528 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5531 \begin_layout Standard
5533 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5547 Here's how you use them:
5550 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 Put the title of your document in the
5558 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 Put the author name in the
5566 \begin_layout Itemize
5567 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5568 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5574 Note that using this environment is optional.
5575 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5576 will automatically insert today's date.
5577 If you don't want a date, use the option
5579 Suppress default date on front page
5583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5586 \begin_inset space ~
5594 \begin_layout Standard
5595 You can use footnotes to insert
5596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5603 or contact information.
5606 \begin_layout Subsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 name "subsec:Headings"
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5630 takes care of the numbering for you.
5633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5635 \begin_inset Index idx
5638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5639 Section headings ! Numbered
5647 \begin_layout Standard
5648 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5652 \begin_layout Enumerate
5658 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 \begin_layout Enumerate
5682 \begin_layout Enumerate
5688 \begin_layout Enumerate
5694 \begin_layout Standard
5696 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5697 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5698 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5699 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5703 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5709 \begin_layout Standard
5710 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5711 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5712 You group the book into chapters.
5714 does a similar grouping:
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 is divided into either
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5745 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5793 \begin_layout Standard
5794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5802 Not all document types use the
5806 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5811 is the top-level heading.
5819 \begin_layout Standard
5824 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5825 labels it with its number,
5826 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5828 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5842 \begin_inset Index idx
5845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5846 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5854 \begin_layout Standard
5855 The unnumbered section headings have a
5856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5863 at the end of their name.
5864 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5865 the table of contents, see section
5866 \begin_inset space ~
5870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5880 Changing the Numbering
5881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5883 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5892 in the Table of Contents.
5893 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5895 Just as certain classes start with
5909 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5919 This is something you can change.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5929 \begin_inset Index idx
5932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5941 \begin_inset space ~
5945 \begin_inset space ~
5950 you will see two counters.
5955 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5956 numbers a section heading.
5957 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5962 Short Titles of Headings
5963 \begin_inset Index idx
5966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5967 Section headings ! Short titles
5973 \begin_inset Argument 1
5976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5985 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5992 \begin_layout Standard
5993 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5994 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5995 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5996 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6001 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6002 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6003 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6004 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6009 \begin_inset space ~
6015 This will insert a box labeled
6016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6020 \begin_inset space ~
6024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6027 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6028 This also works for captions inside floats.
6029 There can only be one short title per title.
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6040 \begin_layout Standard
6041 The following information applies to all section headings:
6044 \begin_layout Itemize
6045 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6048 \begin_layout Itemize
6049 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6052 \begin_layout Itemize
6053 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6056 \begin_layout Itemize
6057 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6060 \begin_layout Subsection
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6066 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6080 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6081 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6082 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6083 the text they contain.
6084 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6092 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6095 \begin_layout Standard
6096 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6105 when you start a new paragraph.
6106 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6110 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6111 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6112 have to change back to the
6116 environment yourself.
6119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6128 \begin_inset Index idx
6131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6140 \begin_layout Standard
6141 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6142 time for the differences.
6151 are identical except for one difference:
6155 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6164 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 Here's an example of the
6181 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6183 See – no indentation!
6187 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6188 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6189 the other paragraph.
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 Here's another example, this time in the
6200 \begin_layout Quotation
6206 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6207 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6208 the first line, then
6212 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6216 you were quoting other text.
6219 \begin_layout Quotation
6220 Here's a new paragraph.
6221 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6222 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6226 As the examples show,
6230 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6231 They should put quotes in the
6236 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6240 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6245 \begin_inset Index idx
6248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6255 \begin_inset Index idx
6258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6274 \begin_layout Standard
6279 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6285 \begin_inset Newline newline
6288 Which I did not rehearse!
6292 It could be much worse.
6293 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6295 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6296 indented a bit more than the first.
6297 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6303 \begin_inset Newline newline
6306 And make things look fine
6307 \begin_inset Newline newline
6313 arg "newline-insert newline"
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6324 does not indent both margins.
6325 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6326 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6329 arg "newline-insert newline"
6335 \begin_layout Subsection
6337 \begin_inset Index idx
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6358 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6368 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6369 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6378 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6379 lets you provide your own label.
6380 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6381 describing some general features of all four of them.
6384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6388 \begin_layout Standard
6389 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6391 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6392 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6401 reset the environment to
6405 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6406 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6407 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6411 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6415 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6422 \begin_layout Standard
6423 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6424 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6425 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6427 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6428 you read all of section
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6435 reference "sec:Nesting"
6442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6444 \begin_inset Index idx
6447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6468 paragraph environment.
6469 It has the following properties:
6472 \begin_layout Itemize
6473 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6477 \begin_layout Itemize
6479 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6482 \begin_layout Itemize
6483 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6487 \begin_layout Itemize
6488 The items can have any length.
6490 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6491 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6498 \begin_layout Itemize
6503 environment inside another
6507 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6511 \begin_layout Itemize
6512 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6515 \begin_layout Itemize
6517 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6520 \begin_layout Itemize
6522 \begin_inset space ~
6526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6528 reference "sec:Nesting"
6532 for a full explanation of nesting.
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6537 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6546 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6550 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6551 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6554 \begin_layout Itemize
6555 The label for the first level
6559 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6563 \begin_layout Itemize
6564 The label for the second level is a dash.
6568 \begin_layout Itemize
6569 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6573 \begin_layout Itemize
6574 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6578 \begin_layout Itemize
6579 Back out to the third level.
6583 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 Back to the second level.
6588 \begin_layout Itemize
6589 Back to the outermost level.
6592 \begin_layout Standard
6593 These are the default labels for an
6598 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6603 dialog in the submenu
6608 \begin_inset Index idx
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6621 \begin_layout Standard
6622 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6623 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6625 \begin_inset space ~
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6631 reference "sec:Nesting"
6638 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6640 \begin_inset Index idx
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6652 name "sec:Enumerate"
6659 \begin_layout Standard
6664 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6665 It has these properties:
6668 \begin_layout Enumerate
6669 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6673 \begin_layout Enumerate
6674 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6678 \begin_layout Enumerate
6680 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6683 \begin_layout Enumerate
6688 environment resets the counter to one.
6691 \begin_layout Enumerate
6704 \begin_layout Enumerate
6705 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6706 Items can have any length.
6709 \begin_layout Enumerate
6710 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6713 \begin_layout Enumerate
6714 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6717 \begin_layout Enumerate
6718 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6731 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6733 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6734 labels the four different levels in an
6741 \begin_layout Enumerate
6742 The first level of an
6746 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6750 \begin_layout Enumerate
6751 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6755 \begin_layout Enumerate
6756 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6764 \begin_layout Enumerate
6765 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6770 \begin_layout Enumerate
6771 Back to the third level
6775 \begin_layout Enumerate
6776 Back to the second level.
6780 \begin_layout Enumerate
6781 Back to the outermost level.
6784 \begin_layout Standard
6785 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6789 environment, see section
6790 \begin_inset space ~
6794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6796 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6801 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 There is more to nesting
6810 environments than we've stated here.
6811 You should read section
6812 \begin_inset space ~
6816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6818 reference "sec:Nesting"
6822 to learn more about nesting.
6825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6827 \begin_inset Index idx
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_layout Standard
6840 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6844 list has no fixed label.
6845 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6854 of the first line as the label.
6858 \begin_layout Description
6859 Example: This is an example of the
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6868 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6881 it is meant that the first usage of the
6885 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6887 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6888 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
6892 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
6901 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6907 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6909 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
6911 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
6915 \begin_inset space ~
6921 \begin_inset space ~
6925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6927 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6931 for more information.) Here is an example:
6934 \begin_layout Description
6936 \begin_inset space ~
6939 Example: This one shows how to use a
6940 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
6944 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
6948 \begin_inset space ~
6960 \begin_layout Description
6961 Usage: You should use the
6965 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6966 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6968 It's not a good idea to use a
6972 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6973 You're better off using
6985 paragraphs into them.
6988 \begin_layout Description
6989 Nesting: You can nest
6993 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6997 \begin_layout Standard
6998 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6999 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
7000 them from the first line.
7003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7005 \begin_inset Index idx
7008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7022 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7023 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7027 \begin_layout Standard
7036 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7038 Here are its properties:
7041 \begin_layout Labeling
7042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7044 \begin_inset space ~
7047 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7056 of each line as the item label.
7061 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7062 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a
7063 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
7065 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
7068 space as described above.
7071 \begin_layout Labeling
7072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7073 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7074 uses different margins for the item label and the
7075 body of the item text.
7076 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7077 label width plus a little extra space.
7080 \begin_layout Labeling
7081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7083 \begin_inset space ~
7086 width \SpecialChar LyX
7087 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7088 If the label width is larger, the label
7089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7096 into the first line.
7097 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7098 margin of the rest of the item text.
7101 \begin_layout Labeling
7102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7104 \begin_inset space ~
7107 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7112 environment has the same left margin.
7113 \begin_inset Newline newline
7116 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7121 \begin_inset space ~
7126 dialog (toolbar button
7129 arg "layout-paragraph"
7136 \begin_inset space ~
7141 determines the default label width.
7142 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7151 multiple times instead.
7152 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7162 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7165 \begin_inset space ~
7170 every time you alter a label in a
7175 \begin_inset Newline newline
7178 The predefined default width is the length of
7179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7187 \begin_inset space ~
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7198 list the same way as the
7202 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7208 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7212 \begin_layout Standard
7217 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7220 \begin_inset space ~
7224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7226 reference "sec:Nesting"
7230 to learn about nesting.
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7234 There is yet another feature of the
7238 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7239 left-justifies the item labels by
7241 You can use additional
7244 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
7249 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7250 justifies the item label.
7254 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
7256 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
7258 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
7263 are documented in section
7264 \begin_inset space ~
7268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7270 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7275 Here are some examples:
7278 \begin_layout Labeling
7279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7280 Left The default for
7287 \begin_layout Labeling
7288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7289 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7295 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
7300 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7303 \begin_layout Labeling
7304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7305 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
7320 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7323 \begin_layout Subsection
7325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7327 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7332 \begin_inset Index idx
7335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7345 The features described in this section require that the module
7347 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7349 is loaded in the document settings.
7350 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7356 \begin_inset Index idx
7359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7370 Custom Enumerate Lists
7371 \begin_inset Index idx
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7375 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7383 \begin_layout Standard
7385 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7391 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7392 There you add the command
7395 \begin_layout Standard
7403 \begin_layout Standard
7415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7416 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7417 Code, look at section
7418 \begin_inset space ~
7422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7424 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7437 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7444 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7445 For capital Roman numerals replace
7457 in the command above.
7458 For Arabic numerals use
7466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7473 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7498 You can only number 26
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7502 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7512 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7519 \begin_layout Enumerate
7520 \begin_inset Argument 1
7523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_layout Enumerate
7550 \begin_inset Argument 1
7553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7576 \begin_layout Enumerate
7581 \begin_layout Enumerate
7582 \begin_inset Argument 1
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Enumerate
7610 \begin_inset Argument 1
7613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7639 \begin_layout Standard
7640 For this list these commands were used:
7643 \begin_layout Standard
7654 \begin_inset Newline newline
7662 \begin_inset Newline newline
7670 \begin_inset Newline newline
7680 \begin_layout Standard
7687 makes the label emphasized and
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7705 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7706 lists until you change the definition.
7714 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7716 \begin_inset Index idx
7719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7728 \begin_layout Standard
7729 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7732 \begin_layout Enumerate
7733 \begin_inset Argument 1
7736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7755 \begin_inset Note Note
7758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7759 goes back to default numbering
7767 \begin_layout Enumerate
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7775 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7786 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7787 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7788 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7789 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7790 , but in the output.
7795 \begin_layout Standard
7796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7816 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7817 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7818 of a normal enumeration.
7819 There, insert the command
7822 \begin_layout Standard
7828 \begin_layout Standard
7833 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7837 \begin_layout Enumerate
7841 \begin_layout Enumerate
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7846 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7849 \begin_layout Enumerate
7850 \begin_inset Argument 1
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7869 This enumeration starts at 4
7872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7874 \begin_inset Index idx
7877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7887 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7889 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7892 \begin_layout Itemize
7896 \begin_layout Itemize
7897 with standard spacing
7900 \begin_layout Standard
7901 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7903 Add there the command
7907 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7910 \begin_layout Itemize
7911 \begin_inset Argument 1
7914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7933 \begin_layout Itemize
7937 \begin_layout Itemize
7941 \begin_layout Standard
7942 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7949 \begin_inset Index idx
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7960 For more information see its documentation,
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7972 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7974 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7975 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7979 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7982 \begin_layout Enumerate
7983 \begin_inset Argument 1
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 parindent, labelsep=2cm
8007 \begin_layout Enumerate
8008 with negative indentation
8011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8012 Further Customization
8013 \begin_inset Index idx
8016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 Lists ! Customization
8025 \begin_layout Standard
8026 You can also change the style of description lists.
8030 \begin_layout Standard
8036 \begin_layout Standard
8037 changes the description label font, the command
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8046 \begin_layout Standard
8047 sets the list style.
8050 \begin_layout Standard
8051 An example where the command
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8059 itshape, style=nextline
8062 \begin_layout Standard
8066 \begin_layout Description
8068 \begin_inset space ~
8072 \begin_inset Argument 1
8075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8081 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8083 itshape, style=nextline
8093 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8094 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8098 \begin_layout Description
8100 \begin_inset space ~
8103 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8104 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8105 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8109 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8115 \begin_inset Index idx
8118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8126 For more information see its documentation
8127 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8137 \begin_layout Subsection
8139 \begin_inset Index idx
8142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8151 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8153 \begin_inset space ~
8156 Address: An Overview
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8161 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8169 \begin_inset space ~
8175 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8176 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8177 gags on the document.
8178 In contrast, you can use the
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8190 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8191 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8195 \begin_layout Standard
8196 Of course, you're not limited to using
8203 \begin_inset space ~
8212 \begin_inset space ~
8217 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8218 some European academic papers.
8221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8225 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8232 \begin_layout Standard
8237 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8238 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8242 \begin_inset space ~
8247 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8248 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8249 Here's an example of each:
8252 \begin_layout Right Address
8254 \begin_inset Newline newline
8258 \begin_inset Newline newline
8262 \begin_inset Newline newline
8265 When is it? What is today?
8268 \begin_layout Standard
8272 \begin_inset space ~
8278 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8280 the largest block of text on a single line.
8281 Here's an example of the
8288 \begin_layout Address
8290 \begin_inset Newline newline
8293 Where do I send this
8294 \begin_inset Newline newline
8297 Your post office and country
8300 \begin_layout Standard
8301 As you can see, both
8308 \begin_inset space ~
8313 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8318 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8319 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8325 This makes sense, since
8333 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8334 Thus, you have to use
8341 arg "newline-insert newline"
8346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8349 \begin_inset space ~
8353 \begin_inset space ~
8358 ) to start a new line in an
8365 \begin_inset space ~
8373 \begin_layout Subsection
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8379 or list of references.
8381 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8398 \begin_layout Standard
8403 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8404 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8405 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8406 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8410 in anything else or vice versa.
8416 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8417 The book document classes ignores the
8421 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8425 in a letter document class.
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8433 environment does several things for you.
8434 First, it puts the centered label
8435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8443 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8445 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8446 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8447 the subsequent text.
8448 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8450 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8459 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8460 The new paragraph will still be in the
8465 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8466 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8469 \begin_layout Standard
8470 \begin_inset Float figure
8477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8479 \begin_inset Graphics
8480 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8488 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8493 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8514 \begin_layout Standard
8515 We would love to demonstrate the
8519 environment, but since this document is in the
8520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8527 class, we can't do this.
8528 We inserted it therefore as figure
8529 \begin_inset space ~
8533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8535 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8540 If you have never heard of an
8541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8548 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8553 \begin_inset Index idx
8556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8565 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8572 \begin_layout Standard
8577 environment is used to list references.
8578 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8579 only use it at the end of the document.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 When you first open a
8596 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8597 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8613 depending on the document class.
8614 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8615 Each paragraph of the
8619 environment is a bibliography entry.
8624 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8625 Each new paragraph is still in the
8632 \begin_layout Standard
8633 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8634 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8636 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8638 handling, have a look at section
8639 \begin_inset space ~
8643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8645 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8652 \begin_layout Subsection
8653 Special Environments
8656 \begin_layout Standard
8658 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8659 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8667 \begin_inset Index idx
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8680 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8693 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8695 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8700 key as a fixed whitespace.
8704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8715 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
8719 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
8723 \begin_inset space ~
8727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
8729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
8734 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8752 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8755 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8758 arg "newline-insert newline"
8775 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8776 So, when you finish using the
8781 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8782 Also, you can nest the
8787 environment inside of others.
8790 \begin_layout Standard
8791 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8794 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 arg "newline-insert newline"
8801 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8806 \begin_inset space \space{}
8816 arg "newline-insert newline"
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8826 arg "newline-insert newline"
8836 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8844 You must put at least one
8848 in any line you want blank.
8849 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8853 \begin_layout Itemize
8854 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8858 since that will insert
8863 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8866 arg "self-insert \""
8872 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8880 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8893 printf("Hello World!
8898 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8902 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 This is just the standard
8908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8918 \begin_layout Standard
8924 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8926 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8927 as if you used a typewriter.
8928 \begin_inset Index idx
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 Paragraph environments|)
8937 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8940 Program Code Listings
8945 \begin_inset space ~
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8957 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8969 \begin_layout Standard
8974 environment is similar to the
8979 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8980 computer console text.
8985 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8999 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
9000 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
9002 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
9005 space) and you can have empty lines.
9018 \begin_layout Itemize
9019 have a certain language and a text style
9022 \begin_layout Itemize
9023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
9024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
9025 and \SpecialChar TeX
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 Because of these properties
9034 works like a typewriter.
9038 \begin_layout Verbatim
9043 \begin_layout Verbatim
9047 The following 2 lines are empty:
9050 \begin_layout Verbatim
9054 \begin_layout Verbatim
9058 \begin_layout Verbatim
9060 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9065 \begin_layout Standard
9070 environment is identical to
9074 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9075 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9082 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9087 \begin_layout Section
9088 Nesting Environments
9089 \begin_inset Index idx
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9093 Nesting ! Environments
9099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9108 \begin_layout Subsection
9112 \begin_layout Standard
9114 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9116 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9118 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9120 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9136 \begin_layout Enumerate
9141 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9150 \begin_layout Enumerate
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9156 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9160 \begin_inset space ~
9164 \begin_inset space ~
9172 \begin_inset space ~
9176 \begin_inset space ~
9181 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9183 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9186 arg "depth-increment"
9192 arg "depth-decrement"
9206 arg "depth-increment"
9212 arg "depth-decrement"
9216 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9217 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9221 \begin_layout Standard
9222 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9223 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9224 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9225 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9226 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9229 \begin_layout Standard
9230 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9232 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9234 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9237 \begin_layout Subsection
9238 What You Can and Can't Nest
9241 \begin_layout Standard
9242 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9243 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9246 \begin_layout Standard
9247 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9248 than a simple yes or no.
9249 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9253 Completely unnestable
9256 \begin_layout Itemize
9257 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9261 \begin_layout Itemize
9262 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9266 \begin_layout Standard
9267 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9268 environments have them:
9271 \begin_layout Description
9272 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9273 Can't nest into them.
9277 \begin_layout Itemize
9283 \begin_layout Itemize
9289 \begin_layout Itemize
9295 \begin_layout Itemize
9301 \begin_layout Itemize
9308 \begin_layout Description
9310 \begin_inset space ~
9313 Nestable You can nest them.
9314 You can nest other things into them.
9318 \begin_layout Itemize
9324 \begin_layout Itemize
9330 \begin_layout Itemize
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9342 \begin_layout Itemize
9348 \begin_layout Itemize
9354 \begin_layout Itemize
9360 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Itemize
9380 \begin_layout Description
9381 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9382 You can't nest anything into them.
9386 \begin_layout Itemize
9392 \begin_layout Itemize
9398 \begin_layout Itemize
9404 \begin_layout Itemize
9410 \begin_layout Itemize
9416 \begin_layout Itemize
9422 \begin_layout Itemize
9428 \begin_layout Itemize
9434 \begin_layout Itemize
9440 \begin_layout Itemize
9446 \begin_layout Itemize
9452 \begin_layout Itemize
9458 \begin_layout Itemize
9464 \begin_layout Itemize
9468 \begin_inset space ~
9474 \begin_layout Itemize
9481 \begin_layout Standard
9482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9490 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9500 \begin_inset space ~
9503 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9504 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9505 nested section headings violate this.
9513 \begin_layout Subsection
9514 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9515 \begin_inset Index idx
9518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9519 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9527 \begin_layout Standard
9528 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9529 affected by nesting anyhow.
9533 \begin_layout Itemize
9537 \begin_layout Itemize
9541 \begin_layout Itemize
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9555 Figures and tables in
9559 are not affected by this.
9564 Have a look at section
9565 \begin_inset space ~
9569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9571 reference "sec:Floats"
9575 for more information about
9582 \begin_layout Standard
9584 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9585 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9589 \begin_layout Standard
9590 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9598 of its own, it behaves just like a
9599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9606 paragraph environment.
9607 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9611 \begin_layout Standard
9612 Here's an example with a table:
9615 \begin_layout Enumerate
9620 \begin_layout Enumerate
9621 This is (a) and it's nested.
9625 \begin_layout Standard
9626 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9632 \begin_layout Standard
9634 \begin_inset Tabular
9635 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9636 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9723 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9736 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9741 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9750 This is (a) and it's nested.
9754 \begin_layout Standard
9755 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9761 \begin_layout Standard
9763 \begin_inset Tabular
9764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9765 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9766 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9851 \begin_layout Standard
9852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9865 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9872 \begin_layout Standard
9873 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9877 \begin_layout Standard
9878 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9881 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9884 \begin_layout Enumerate
9889 \begin_layout Enumerate
9890 This is (a) and it's nested.
9893 \begin_layout Standard
9894 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9900 \begin_layout Standard
9902 \begin_inset Tabular
9903 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9904 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9906 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9991 \begin_layout Standard
9992 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9998 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
10007 \begin_layout Enumerate
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
10018 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10019 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
10023 \begin_layout Subsection
10024 Usage and General Features
10027 \begin_layout Standard
10028 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10029 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10038 is the innermost possible depth.
10039 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10042 \begin_layout Enumerate
10043 level #1 – outermost
10047 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 \begin_layout Itemize
10067 \begin_layout Itemize
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10077 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10078 both of them in the example.
10079 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10089 For example, if we tried to nest another
10094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10101 , we would get errors.
10104 \begin_layout Subsection
10106 \begin_inset Index idx
10109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10118 \begin_layout Standard
10119 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10120 We have several examples of nested environments.
10121 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10126 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10129 \begin_layout Labeling
10130 \labelwidthstring MMM
10131 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10140 \begin_layout Labeling
10141 \labelwidthstring MMM
10142 #2-a This is level #2.
10143 We created it by using
10146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10152 arg "depth-increment"
10159 \begin_layout Labeling
10160 \labelwidthstring MMM
10161 #3-a This is level #3.
10162 This time, we just enter
10169 arg "depth-increment"
10173 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10183 arg "depth-increment"
10190 \begin_layout Standard
10195 environment, nested inside of
10196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10204 So, it's at level #4.
10205 We did this by entering
10208 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10214 arg "depth-increment"
10217 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10222 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10238 \begin_layout Standard
10243 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10252 \begin_layout Labeling
10253 \labelwidthstring MMM
10254 #4-a This is level #4.
10258 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10266 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10270 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10275 keep nesting things inside
10276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10287 \begin_layout Labeling
10288 \labelwidthstring MMM
10289 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10294 \begin_layout Labeling
10295 \labelwidthstring MMM
10296 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10297 and this is level #6.
10298 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10302 \begin_layout Labeling
10303 \labelwidthstring MMM
10304 #5-b Back to level #5.
10308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10314 arg "depth-decrement"
10321 \begin_layout Labeling
10322 \labelwidthstring MMM
10326 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10332 arg "depth-decrement"
10335 , we're back at level #4.
10339 \begin_layout Labeling
10340 \labelwidthstring MMM
10341 #3-b Back to level #3.
10342 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10346 \begin_layout Labeling
10347 \labelwidthstring MMM
10348 #2-b Back to level #2.
10352 \begin_layout Labeling
10353 \labelwidthstring MMM
10354 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10355 After this sentence, we will enter
10359 and change the paragraph environment back to
10366 \begin_layout Standard
10367 We could have also used the
10383 environment in place of the
10388 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10392 Example 2: Inheritance
10395 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10396 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10399 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10412 \begin_inset Newline newline
10415 which, we will change to the
10423 \begin_layout Enumerate
10428 environment, at level #2.
10431 \begin_layout Enumerate
10432 Notice how the nested
10436 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10440 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10444 \begin_layout Standard
10445 We ended this example by entering
10450 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10454 and reset the nesting depth by using
10457 arg "depth-decrement"
10463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10464 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10473 \begin_inset Argument 1
10476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 This is level #1, in an
10490 paragraph environment.
10491 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10506 arg "depth-increment"
10510 Now, what happens if we nest an
10514 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10515 label be? An asterisk?
10519 \begin_layout Itemize
10529 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10530 So, its label is a bullet.
10531 (We got here by using
10534 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10540 arg "depth-increment"
10543 , then changing the environment to
10551 \begin_layout Itemize
10552 Here's level #4, produced using
10555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10561 arg "depth-increment"
10565 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10570 \begin_layout Enumerate
10572 to get to level #5.
10573 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10578 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10582 , because we are in the
10590 environment (that is, it is an
10605 \begin_layout Enumerate
10610 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10611 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10615 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10619 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10622 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10625 \begin_layout Enumerate
10629 arg "depth-decrement"
10632 to decrease the depth after the next
10635 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10649 \begin_layout Enumerate
10651 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10652 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10656 \begin_layout Enumerate
10657 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10666 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10671 reset the counter for the label.
10675 \begin_layout Enumerate
10679 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10685 arg "depth-decrement"
10688 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10689 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10690 into the twofold-nested
10698 \begin_layout Enumerate
10699 The same thing happens if we do another
10702 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10708 arg "depth-decrement"
10711 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10714 \begin_layout Standard
10715 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10720 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10731 The number of other
10735 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10742 The same rule applies for the
10746 environment, as well.
10749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10750 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10753 \begin_layout Enumerate
10754 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10755 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10756 the same detail with how we did it.
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10773 arg "depth-increment"
10780 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10781 the example in parentheses someplace.
10782 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10783 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10784 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10788 \begin_layout Enumerate
10793 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10797 \begin_layout Verse
10798 Now we will add verse.
10799 \begin_inset Newline newline
10802 It will get much worse.
10803 \begin_inset Newline newline
10813 arg "depth-increment"
10823 \begin_layout Verse
10824 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10829 \begin_inset Newline newline
10835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10843 \begin_layout Verse
10844 Here comes a table:
10848 \begin_layout Standard
10849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10857 \begin_inset Tabular
10858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10946 \begin_layout Verse
10950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10960 arg "depth-increment"
10966 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10972 \begin_inset Newline newline
10980 arg "depth-decrement"
10987 \begin_layout Enumerate
10992 : level #1) This is another item.
10993 Note that selecting a
10997 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10998 3 times to put the table inside the
11005 \begin_layout Quotation
11006 We're now ending the
11010 list and changing to
11015 We're still at level #1.
11016 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11017 The next set of paragraphs is a
11018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11025 We will nest both the
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11037 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
11041 for the letter body.
11045 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11048 to preserve the depth.
11049 Remember that you need to use
11052 arg "newline-insert newline"
11055 to create multiple lines inside the
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11072 \begin_layout Right Address
11074 \begin_inset Newline newline
11077 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11078 \begin_inset Newline newline
11084 \begin_layout Address
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11092 \begin_layout Quotation
11093 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11097 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11098 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11099 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11100 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11101 as soon as possible.
11102 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11105 \begin_layout Quotation
11106 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11107 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11108 with your order, along with payment.
11111 \begin_layout Quotation
11112 We thank you again for your patience.
11115 \begin_layout Address
11117 \begin_inset Newline newline
11124 \begin_layout Quotation
11125 That ends that example!
11128 \begin_layout Standard
11129 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11130 gives you a lot of power with just
11132 We could have easily nested an
11153 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11156 \begin_layout Subsection
11158 \begin_inset Index idx
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 Nesting ! Separation
11168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11170 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11177 \begin_layout Standard
11178 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11180 For example you need two different enumerations:
11183 \begin_layout Enumerate
11188 \begin_layout Enumerate
11193 \begin_layout Enumerate
11197 \begin_layout Standard
11198 \begin_inset Separator plain
11204 \begin_layout Itemize
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11211 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11217 \begin_layout Enumerate
11221 \begin_layout Enumerate
11225 \begin_layout Enumerate
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11231 list item and use the menu
11233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11234 Separated <Name> Above
11238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11239 Separated <Name> Below
11242 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11243 ) and before or behind it the
11245 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11248 \begin_layout Standard
11249 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11250 (red arrow in LyX).
11251 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11252 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11256 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11259 arg "paragraph-break"
11266 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11269 \begin_layout Section
11270 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11271 \begin_inset Index idx
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 \begin_layout Standard
11284 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11285 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11287 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11288 be broken at the end of a line.
11289 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11293 \begin_layout Subsection
11295 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
11297 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
11301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11303 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11308 \begin_inset Index idx
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
11315 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
11326 \begin_layout Standard
11328 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
11330 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
11333 space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11334 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11336 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
11339 break the line at that point.
11340 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11343 \begin_layout Quote
11344 Further documentation is given in section
11345 \begin_inset Newline newline
11349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11351 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11358 \begin_layout Standard
11359 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a
11360 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
11362 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
11366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11380 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11390 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
11392 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
11397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11398 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11400 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
11402 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
11406 \begin_inset space ~
11414 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11420 \begin_layout Subsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 Spacing ! Horizontal
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11442 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11445 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11449 The length units are listed in Appendix
11450 \begin_inset space ~
11454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11456 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11465 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
11467 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
11471 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
11473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11475 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
11480 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
11482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11484 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11491 \begin_inset Index idx
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11496 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
11498 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11510 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11511 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11512 at the ends of sentences.
11513 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11514 automatically takes care about this.
11515 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11516 followed by a period; see section
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11523 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11528 To insert a normal space, select
11530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11533 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
11535 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11547 arg "space-insert normal"
11553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11555 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
11559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11561 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11566 \begin_inset Index idx
11569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 \begin_layout Standard
11580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11584 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
11588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11591 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11596 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
11598 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
11602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11606 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11607 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11608 inside abbreviations:
11611 \begin_layout Quote
11613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11617 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 or between values and units.
11622 Compare for example this:
11623 \begin_inset Newline newline
11627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 10 kg (normal space
11635 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11647 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11663 arg "space-insert thin"
11669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11673 \begin_layout Standard
11674 You can also insert the following space types:
11677 \begin_layout Description
11679 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11691 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11695 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11699 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11701 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11704 space between the arrows.
11705 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11709 \begin_layout Description
11711 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11713 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11720 space A line with a
11721 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11725 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11729 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11733 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11735 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11738 space between the arrows.
11741 \begin_layout Description
11743 \begin_inset space ~
11747 \begin_inset space ~
11750 space A line with a
11751 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11755 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11759 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11762 negative thin space between the arrows.
11765 \begin_layout Description
11767 \begin_inset space ~
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11774 space A line with a
11775 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11779 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11783 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11786 negative medium space between the arrows.
11789 \begin_layout Description
11791 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_inset space ~
11798 space A line with a
11799 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11803 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11807 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11810 negative thick space between the arrows.
11813 \begin_layout Description
11815 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
11817 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
11819 \begin_inset space ~
11825 \begin_inset space ~
11829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11833 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11837 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11841 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11845 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
11847 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11855 \begin_inset space ~
11859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11862 em) space between the arrows.
11865 \begin_layout Description
11867 \begin_inset space ~
11871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11875 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11879 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11883 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11887 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
11889 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
11893 \begin_inset space ~
11897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11900 em) space between the arrows.
11903 \begin_layout Description
11905 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
11907 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11915 \begin_inset space ~
11919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11923 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11927 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11931 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11935 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
11937 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
11939 \begin_inset space ~
11943 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
11947 \begin_inset space ~
11951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11954 em) space between the arrows.
11957 \begin_layout Description
11959 \begin_inset space ~
11963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11967 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11979 cm space between the arrows.
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11984 \begin_inset space ~
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11990 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11994 lists the different space sizes.
11997 \begin_layout Standard
11998 \begin_inset Float table
12005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12006 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12011 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12015 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12025 \begin_inset Tabular
12026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12027 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12084 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
12086 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
12087 Non-breaking Normal
12094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12118 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12127 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
12129 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12144 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12161 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12172 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12189 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12215 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
12217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12221 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12285 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12290 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
12292 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
12296 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
12298 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
12302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12315 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
12317 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
12321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12325 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
12327 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12371 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12376 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
12378 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12418 \begin_inset Index idx
12421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 Horizontal fills (H
12432 \change_inserted 177693 1654621638
12435 Fills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12436 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
12438 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
12441 Fill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals the
12442 remaining space between the left and right margins.
12443 If there is more than one H
12444 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
12447 Fill on a line, they divide the available space equally between themselves.
12450 \begin_layout Standard
12451 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12454 \begin_layout Quote
12456 This is on the left side
12457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12460 This is on the right
12463 \begin_layout Quote
12466 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12476 \begin_layout Quote
12479 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12483 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12487 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 That was an example in the
12500 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12508 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12511 is one in a standard paragraph.
12512 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12516 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12519 \begin_layout Standard
12521 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
12523 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
12526 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
12529 \begin_inset space ~
12534 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12537 \begin_layout Standard
12539 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_layout Standard
12551 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12561 \begin_layout Standard
12563 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12573 \begin_layout Standard
12575 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12579 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_layout Standard
12587 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12589 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12593 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12594 (= opened downwards)
12597 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12601 \begin_inset space ~
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12609 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12611 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12615 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12619 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12623 \begin_inset space ~
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12630 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
12641 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
12644 is at the beginning of a line, and
12648 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12651 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
12653 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
12656 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12657 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12658 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
12662 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
12667 option in the space dialog.
12675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12679 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12684 \begin_inset Index idx
12687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12696 \begin_layout Standard
12697 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12698 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12701 \begin_layout Standard
12702 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12705 What is correct English?:
12706 \begin_inset Newline newline
12710 \begin_inset Newline newline
12714 \begin_inset space ~
12717 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12718 \begin_inset Newline newline
12722 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 \begin_inset Newline newline
12737 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12756 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12773 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12776 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12780 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12790 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12797 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12806 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12807 That is why it is named
12808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12816 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12817 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12821 \begin_layout Subsection
12823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12825 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12830 \begin_inset Index idx
12833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12842 \begin_layout Standard
12843 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12846 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12848 \begin_inset space ~
12854 There you find the following sizes:
12857 \begin_layout Standard
12861 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
12869 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
12877 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
12882 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12883 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12887 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
12892 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12895 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12897 \begin_inset space ~
12903 \begin_inset Index idx
12906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12907 Document ! Settings
12912 for the paragraph separation.
12913 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12916 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
12924 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
12930 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12934 \begin_layout Standard
12936 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12945 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12946 size including line spacing.
12951 \begin_layout Standard
12955 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
12961 \begin_inset Index idx
12964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12970 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12971 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12976 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12977 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12981 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
12989 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
12994 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13002 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
13007 s are described in section
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13014 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13023 If there are several
13026 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
13031 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13032 You can therefore use
13035 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
13040 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13043 \begin_layout Standard
13048 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13049 \begin_inset space ~
13053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13055 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13062 \begin_layout Standard
13063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13073 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
13074 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13086 \begin_layout Subsection
13087 Paragraph Alignment
13088 \begin_inset Index idx
13091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13092 Paragraph ! Alignment
13100 \begin_layout Standard
13101 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13106 dialog (toolbar button
13109 arg "layout-paragraph"
13113 There are five possibilities:
13116 \begin_layout Itemize
13124 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13130 \begin_layout Itemize
13138 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13144 \begin_layout Itemize
13152 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13158 \begin_layout Itemize
13166 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13172 \begin_layout Itemize
13180 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13186 \begin_layout Standard
13187 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
13188 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
13189 the left and right margins.
13190 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13195 This paragraph is right aligned,
13198 \begin_layout Standard
13200 this one is centered,
13203 \begin_layout Standard
13205 this one is left aligned.
13208 \begin_layout Subsection
13210 \begin_inset Index idx
13213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13214 Page breaks ! Forced
13220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13222 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13230 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13231 does the page breaks in your document, you can
13232 force a page break where you want one.
13233 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13234 is good at page breaking.
13235 Only if you use a lot of
13239 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
13240 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13243 \begin_layout Standard
13244 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
13245 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13249 have to change the page breaking.
13252 \begin_layout Standard
13253 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
13255 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13258 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13260 \begin_inset space ~
13266 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
13268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13276 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
13278 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
13279 on which only the last few lines are absent.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
13284 at the top of a page.
13285 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
13287 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
13288 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
13289 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13293 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13297 to learn more about
13304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13308 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13313 \begin_inset Index idx
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 Page breaks ! Clear
13325 \begin_layout Standard
13326 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
13327 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13328 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
13329 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
13330 it, if necessary by adding pages.
13333 \begin_layout Standard
13334 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13337 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13345 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
13347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13348 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13354 \begin_inset space ~
13359 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13360 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13361 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13367 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13368 Suppressing Page Breaks
13371 \begin_inset Index idx
13374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13376 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13380 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13389 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13393 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13398 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13402 \begin_layout Standard
13404 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13405 To discourage page break at
13406 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13408 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13409 certain point you can use
13413 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13415 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13418 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13420 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13427 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13428 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13429 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13430 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13435 \begin_layout Subsection
13437 \begin_inset Index idx
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13449 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13459 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13462 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13476 arg "newline-insert newline"
13480 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13483 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13485 \begin_inset space ~
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13497 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13500 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13502 This is useful to avoid
13503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13510 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13513 \begin_layout Standard
13514 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13515 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13517 very good at line breaking.
13518 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13519 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13526 reference "sec:Quote"
13531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13533 reference "sec:Verse"
13538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13540 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13547 \begin_layout Subsection
13549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13551 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13556 \begin_inset Index idx
13559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13568 \begin_layout Standard
13570 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13581 \begin_layout Standard
13585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13586 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13593 you can insert horizontal lines.
13594 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13595 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13596 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13599 \begin_layout Standard
13601 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13612 \begin_layout Section
13613 Characters and Symbols
13616 \begin_layout Standard
13617 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13618 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13619 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13627 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13631 for information on how this is done.
13634 \begin_layout Standard
13635 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13640 dialog via the menu
13642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13643 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13649 \begin_layout Standard
13650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13658 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13659 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13661 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13669 \begin_layout Section
13670 Fonts and Text Styles
13671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13673 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13680 \begin_layout Subsection
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13694 \begin_layout Standard
13695 There are two types of fonts:
13698 \begin_layout Description
13700 \begin_inset space ~
13704 \begin_inset Index idx
13707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13713 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13718 characters) in the font.
13719 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13720 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13721 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13722 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13723 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13724 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13725 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13726 \begin_inset Newline newline
13729 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13730 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13731 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13732 sizes than at small ones.
13733 \begin_inset Newline newline
13747 \begin_inset space ~
13755 \begin_layout Description
13757 \begin_inset space ~
13761 \begin_inset Index idx
13764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13770 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13771 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13772 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13773 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13774 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13775 image manipulation program.
13776 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13777 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13778 \begin_inset space ~
13781 pixels high up to 34
13782 \begin_inset space ~
13785 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13786 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13787 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13789 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13790 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13791 \begin_inset Newline newline
13794 Bitmap fonts are named
13797 \begin_inset space ~
13802 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13805 \begin_layout Standard
13806 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13807 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13808 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13809 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13810 use scalable fonts.
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13817 \begin_layout Standard
13818 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13822 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13825 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13826 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13827 font, to emphasize text you use an
13828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13836 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13838 In \SpecialChar LyX
13839 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13843 \begin_layout Subsection
13846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13848 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13855 \begin_layout Standard
13856 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13857 used its own fonts.
13858 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13859 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13862 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13863 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13864 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13865 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13866 to a word processor.
13867 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13868 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13869 files are very portable across
13870 different machines.
13871 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13872 has increased a lot
13873 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13876 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13878 \begin_inset space ~
13882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13884 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13889 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13890 code in the document
13891 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13894 \begin_layout Standard
13895 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13896 engines that are also able directly
13897 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13899 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13901 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13903 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13904 that is installed on your system.
13905 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13908 \begin_layout Standard
13909 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13917 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13918 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13926 \begin_layout Subsection
13927 Document Font and Font size
13928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13930 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13935 \begin_inset Index idx
13938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13945 \begin_inset Index idx
13948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13957 \begin_layout Standard
13958 You can set the document fonts in the
13960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13964 \begin_inset Index idx
13967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13968 Document ! Settings
13978 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13979 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13982 \begin_inset space ~
13991 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13993 \begin_inset space ~
13996 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14004 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14005 This requires that you use
14017 as the output format, i.
14018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14022 \begin_inset space \space{}
14025 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14026 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14027 installed (see section
14028 \begin_inset space ~
14032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14034 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14039 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14041 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14042 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14047 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
14048 cannot determine the family.
14049 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
14050 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14053 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
14056 \begin_layout Standard
14057 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14058 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
14063 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14069 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14071 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
14073 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
14076 font encoding, this is
14077 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
14078 , depending on the document language,
14081 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
14082 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14090 \begin_inset space ~
14096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14106 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
14107 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14115 \begin_inset space ~
14121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14129 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
14133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14150 European Computer Modern
14153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14161 However, some classes set different default fonts.
14164 \begin_layout Standard
14169 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
14170 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14175 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14178 \begin_inset space ~
14183 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
14189 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
14190 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
14193 \begin_layout Itemize
14197 \begin_inset space ~
14202 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14215 \begin_inset space ~
14220 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14221 community in order to replace
14225 as the default font.
14226 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14227 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
14230 \begin_inset space ~
14243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14244 One difference is improved kerning.
14252 \begin_layout Itemize
14253 If you do not like the look of
14261 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
14262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14266 \begin_inset space ~
14272 \begin_inset space ~
14282 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14283 \begin_inset space ~
14286 serif and typewriter fonts,
14290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14291 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14298 \begin_inset space ~
14307 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
14308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14312 \begin_inset space \space{}
14320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14324 \begin_inset space \space{}
14330 \begin_inset space ~
14338 \begin_inset space ~
14348 but you can also select your own.
14349 \begin_inset Newline newline
14352 The differences between roman,
14355 \begin_inset space ~
14364 fonts are explained in section
14365 \begin_inset space ~
14369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14371 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14376 \begin_inset Newline newline
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14387 was originally designed for newspapers.
14388 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14389 into the small newspaper columns.
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14398 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14401 \begin_layout Standard
14402 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14415 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14420 depends on the class you are using.
14421 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14425 Note that the font size is the
14430 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14431 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14432 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14433 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14436 \begin_inset space ~
14442 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14443 \begin_inset space ~
14447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14449 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14456 \begin_layout Standard
14460 \begin_inset space ~
14465 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14467 \begin_inset space ~
14470 serif or typewriter.
14475 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14485 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14488 \begin_layout Standard
14493 LaTeX font encoding
14495 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14496 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14502 \begin_inset Index idx
14505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14513 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14515 \begin_inset space ~
14519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14521 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14528 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14529 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14530 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14534 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14542 \begin_layout Standard
14543 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14545 Use Old Style Figures
14549 Use True Small Caps
14552 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14555 Use Old Style Figures
14557 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14559 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14567 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14571 Use True Small Caps
14573 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14574 of scaled capitals.
14575 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14576 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14577 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14581 \begin_layout Standard
14583 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14584 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14585 provided by the font package (or the
14589 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14594 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14600 \begin_layout Standard
14605 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14606 a font to display the script characters.
14610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14611 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14617 \begin_inset Index idx
14620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14627 So this has no effect for the document language
14643 \begin_layout Standard
14646 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14648 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14649 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14655 \begin_inset Index idx
14658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14660 packages ! microtype
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14672 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14674 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14679 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14680 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14686 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14687 \begin_inset space ~
14691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14693 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14704 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14716 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14721 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14722 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14724 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14726 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14729 dialog, see section
14730 \begin_inset space ~
14734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14736 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14748 \begin_layout Subsection
14752 \begin_layout Standard
14753 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14754 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14756 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14757 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14758 choose a math font in the dialog
14760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14764 \begin_inset Index idx
14767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14768 Document ! Settings
14774 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14775 automatically selects a math font.
14776 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14777 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14786 \begin_inset space ~
14792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14797 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14798 document font is available.
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14802 Note that the math font will not be used for
14806 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14812 or by the insertion of the command
14819 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14820 \begin_inset space ~
14824 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14825 while the math characters do not.
14827 \begin_inset space ~
14830 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14841 \begin_inset space ~
14846 in the document font settings.
14849 \begin_layout Standard
14850 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14851 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14852 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14853 font (in most cases
14854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14860 \begin_inset space ~
14866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14869 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14870 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14878 \begin_inset space ~
14884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14890 \begin_layout Subsection
14892 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14902 name "subsec:charstyles"
14909 \begin_inset Index idx
14912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14919 \begin_inset Index idx
14922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14931 \begin_layout Standard
14932 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14933 automatically changes the
14934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14937 style for certain paragraph environments.
14939 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14940 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14942 This is where we meet the concept of
14948 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14950 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14954 \begin_layout Standard
14956 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14961 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14985 e., available with all document classes.
14986 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14990 for specific purposes.
14991 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14994 \begin_layout Standard
14996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14997 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15007 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15011 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
15012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15024 — you customized the
15029 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
15030 among them, encourage the use of
15042 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
15043 \begin_inset space ~
15047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15049 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15054 Rather than fiddling with
15058 , they encourage the use of
15062 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15067 \begin_inset Quotes els
15071 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15074 ), not their form (
15075 \begin_inset Quotes els
15079 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15083 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15084 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
15085 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15086 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15087 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15088 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
15094 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15098 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
15099 With a semantic markup (such as
15103 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
15108 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15110 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
15111 of a document, using different markup semantics.
15114 \begin_layout Standard
15116 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
15117 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
15118 by \SpecialChar LyX
15124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
15127 Builtin Text Styles
15128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15130 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15137 \begin_layout Standard
15139 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
15140 The two builtin text styles can be
15141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
15145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
15149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
15150 both of these styles
15153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
15157 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
15159 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
15161 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
15167 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
15173 \begin_layout Standard
15178 style, do one of the following:
15181 \begin_layout Itemize
15182 click on the toolbar button
15191 \begin_layout Itemize
15192 use the key binding
15199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
15203 \begin_layout Itemize
15205 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15209 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
15211 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
15213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15221 arg "dialog-show character"
15225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
15229 arg "dialog-show character"
15233 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
15234 as described in section
15235 \begin_inset space ~
15239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15241 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15246 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
15256 \begin_layout Standard
15258 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
15260 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
15264 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
15268 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
15270 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
15274 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
15282 style is already active, they deactivate it.
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15286 One typically uses the
15290 style for proper names.
15292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
15309 \begin_layout Standard
15311 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
15316 is producing text in
15320 , but the definition can be changed.
15325 \begin_layout Standard
15327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
15329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
15337 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
15344 \begin_layout Itemize
15345 clicking on the toolbar button
15354 \begin_layout Itemize
15355 using the keybindings
15362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15366 \begin_layout Itemize
15368 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15372 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
15374 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
15376 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15384 arg "dialog-show character"
15388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15392 arg "dialog-show character"
15396 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
15397 as described in section
15398 \begin_inset space ~
15402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15404 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15409 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
15419 \begin_layout Standard
15424 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15428 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15431 packages use a different font
15432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15433 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15439 \begin_layout Standard
15440 We've been using the
15444 style all over the place in this document.
15445 Here's one more example:
15448 \begin_layout Quotation
15452 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15454 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15460 \begin_layout Standard
15461 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15462 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15463 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15464 the common tendency to overuse
15465 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15467 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15472 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15474 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15478 \begin_layout Standard
15480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15481 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15482 only as font changes and integrated in the
15490 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15493 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15500 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15506 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15511 \begin_inset space ~
15514 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15526 arg "dialog-show character"
15532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15534 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15540 arg "dialog-show character"
15544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15554 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15561 \begin_layout Standard
15563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15564 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15572 reference "subsec:Modules"
15579 ), or local layout settings (see section
15580 \begin_inset space ~
15584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15586 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15591 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15595 markup for specific functions.
15596 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15601 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15611 \begin_inset Quotes els
15615 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15621 \begin_layout Standard
15623 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15624 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15626 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15628 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
15630 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15639 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15644 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15645 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15646 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15651 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15652 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15665 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15666 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15667 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15668 \begin_inset Flex Code
15671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15682 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15696 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15710 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15711 on screen their formal appearance.
15716 \begin_layout Subsection
15718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15730 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15738 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15746 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15751 \begin_inset Index idx
15754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15763 \begin_layout Standard
15764 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15765 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15768 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15770 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15777 the properties of text passages
15778 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15782 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15783 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15784 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15785 from ordinary dialog.
15786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15790 \begin_layout Standard
15792 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15793 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15794 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15795 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15796 the properties of the respective text passages.
15801 comes in as a last resort.
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15807 Before we document how to
15808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15809 use custom character style
15810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15811 tweak the text properties
15813 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15820 \begin_inset Newline newline
15823 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15824 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15827 \begin_layout Standard
15829 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15830 use custom character styles
15831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15832 tweak text properties
15835 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15840 \begin_inset space ~
15843 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15851 arg "dialog-show character"
15854 dialog or press the toolbar button
15857 arg "dialog-show character"
15862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15865 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15866 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15871 property that you can choose.
15872 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15880 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15882 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15886 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15888 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15893 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15894 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15895 environments all at once.
15898 \begin_layout Standard
15900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15902 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
15906 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
15908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15912 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
15914 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
15919 , and their options (in addition to
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15928 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15932 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15940 \begin_layout Labeling
15941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15955 The possible options are:
15959 \begin_layout Labeling
15960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15965 This is the Roman font family.
15966 Normally a serif font.
15967 It's also the default family.
15977 \begin_layout Labeling
15978 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15989 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16001 \begin_layout Labeling
16002 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16009 This is the Typewriter font family.
16015 arg "font-typewriter"
16021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
16025 \begin_layout Standard
16027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
16028 The general differences of these families are:
16031 \begin_layout Itemize
16033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
16038 fonts use characters with serifs.
16039 These are the small
16040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16047 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16048 The following example shows the difference:
16049 \begin_inset Newline newline
16053 \begin_inset Newline newline
16058 text without serifs
16061 \begin_inset Newline newline
16064 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16065 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16072 \begin_layout Itemize
16074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16079 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16080 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16081 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16084 \begin_layout Itemize
16086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16099 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16117 \begin_inset Newline newline
16121 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16139 \begin_inset Note Note
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16145 For more on phantoms see section
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16152 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16162 \begin_inset Newline newline
16171 \begin_layout Labeling
16172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16177 This corresponds to the print weight.
16182 \begin_layout Labeling
16183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16188 This is the Medium font series.
16189 It's also the default series.
16192 \begin_layout Labeling
16193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16200 This is the Bold font series.
16213 \begin_layout Labeling
16214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16219 As the name implies.
16224 \begin_layout Labeling
16225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16230 This is the Upright font shape.
16231 It's also the default shape.
16234 \begin_layout Labeling
16235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
16250 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
16255 s the Italic font shape
16261 \begin_layout Labeling
16262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16269 This is the Slanted font shape
16271 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16272 , this is different from italic).
16275 \begin_layout Labeling
16276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16280 \begin_inset space ~
16287 This is the Small caps font shape
16294 \begin_layout Labeling
16295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16297 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16302 Alters the text color.
16303 Note that not all DVI
16304 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
16306 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16307 viewers are able to display colors.
16311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
16313 \begin_inset space ~
16317 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16320 , which means that the document default color set in
16322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16323 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16329 \begin_inset space ~
16335 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
16337 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16339 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
16341 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16419 \begin_inset Index idx
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16429 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16435 \begin_layout Labeling
16436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16438 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16443 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16444 the language of the document.
16445 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16446 workarea in blue to
16447 indicate the change
16448 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16449 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16451 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16453 \begin_inset Newline newline
16456 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16458 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16459 When using the spell checking (see section
16460 \begin_inset space ~
16464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16466 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16470 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16471 \begin_inset Newline newline
16474 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16476 Exclude from Spellchecking
16479 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16484 \begin_layout Labeling
16485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16490 Alters the size of the font.
16492 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16498 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16501 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16502 document font size.
16503 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16504 the details, but a general description of what
16510 \begin_layout Labeling
16511 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16532 arg "font-size tiny"
16538 \begin_layout Labeling
16539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16560 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16566 \begin_layout Labeling
16567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16588 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16594 \begin_layout Labeling
16595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16616 arg "font-size small"
16622 \begin_layout Labeling
16623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 It's also the default size.
16641 arg "font-size normal"
16647 \begin_layout Labeling
16648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 arg "font-size large"
16675 \begin_layout Labeling
16676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16697 arg "font-size larger"
16703 \begin_layout Labeling
16704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 arg "font-size largest"
16731 \begin_layout Labeling
16732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16753 arg "font-size huge"
16759 \begin_layout Labeling
16760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16781 arg "font-size giant"
16787 \begin_layout Labeling
16788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16793 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16813 arg "font-size increase"
16819 \begin_layout Labeling
16820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16825 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16845 arg "font-size decrease"
16851 \begin_layout Standard
16856 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16857 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16859 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16860 — use those instead.
16861 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16862 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
16867 \begin_layout Standard
16869 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
16870 Another combo box allows to tweak
16877 \begin_layout Labeling
16878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16880 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16885 Alters the text color.
16886 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16891 , which means that the document default color set in
16893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 \begin_inset space ~
16905 is used, you can select
16982 \begin_inset Index idx
16985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16987 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17000 \begin_layout Labeling
17001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17003 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
17007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
17013 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
17014 change a few other things at the character level
17015 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
17016 have text passages being underlined
17020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
17021 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
17022 days, when you could not change fonts.
17023 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17024 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17025 because some people
17029 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17036 \begin_layout Labeling
17037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17039 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
17046 This is text with emphasize on
17049 This might seem like the same as
17053 , but it is actually a bit different.
17059 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
17061 Normally this font is equal to italic.
17062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
17066 \begin_layout Labeling
17067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17069 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
17074 Don't use underlining.
17079 \begin_layout Labeling
17080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
17086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
17094 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
17096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
17105 arg "font-underline"
17111 \begin_inset Newline newline
17115 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
17118 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17119 when you could not change fonts.
17120 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17121 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17122 because some people
17126 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17131 \begin_layout Labeling
17132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17147 This is text with Double under
17148 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
17150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
17159 arg "font-underunderline"
17163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
17165 \begin_inset Newline newline
17168 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
17169 about double underbar
17174 \begin_layout Labeling
17175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17179 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
17181 \begin_inset space ~
17190 This is text with Wavy under
17191 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
17193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
17202 arg "font-underwave"
17206 \begin_inset Newline newline
17209 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17210 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17211 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
17216 \begin_layout Labeling
17217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
17224 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17230 \begin_layout Labeling
17231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
17238 Don't use strikethrough.
17241 \begin_layout Labeling
17242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17246 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
17260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
17262 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
17263 Single strikethrough
17271 arg "font-strikeout"
17275 \begin_inset Newline newline
17278 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
17279 changed in the meantime.
17282 \begin_layout Labeling
17283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17285 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
17289 \begin_inset space ~
17293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17299 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
17307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
17309 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
17315 \begin_inset Newline newline
17318 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17322 \begin_layout Standard
17324 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
17325 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17328 \begin_layout Labeling
17329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17331 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
17336 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
17337 the language of the document.
17338 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17339 workarea in blue to
17340 indicate the change.
17341 \begin_inset Newline newline
17344 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17346 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17347 When using the spell checking (see section
17348 \begin_inset space ~
17352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17354 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17358 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17359 \begin_inset Newline newline
17362 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17364 Exclude from Spellchecking
17367 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17370 \begin_layout Standard
17372 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17373 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17374 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17381 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17386 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
17390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17396 \begin_layout Itemize
17398 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17405 This is text with emphasize on
17410 \begin_layout Itemize
17414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17421 This is text with Noun on.
17423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17430 , this is a logical attribute.
17431 Normally it's equivalent to
17434 \begin_inset space ~
17444 \begin_layout Standard
17445 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17446 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17448 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17453 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17454 chosen a new character style
17455 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17456 applied a text property
17459 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17462 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17467 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17475 arg "dialog-show character"
17481 arg "dialog-show character"
17484 ) dialog, the settings are
17485 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17489 You can activate the
17490 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17493 last applied properties
17495 by using the toolbar button
17498 arg "textstyle-apply"
17502 The button lets you apply
17503 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17504 your custom character style
17505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17508 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17510 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17511 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17512 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17513 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 To completely reset the
17520 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17523 text properties of a selection
17525 to the default, use
17526 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17528 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17538 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17543 from the menu of the toolbar button
17546 arg "textstyle-apply"
17553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17554 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17555 you just set the shape to
17556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17574 \begin_inset space ~
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17591 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17599 \begin_inset space ~
17611 \begin_layout Itemize
17613 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17626 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 \begin_inset Newline newline
17648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17662 \begin_inset Note Note
17665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17666 For more on phantoms see section
17667 \begin_inset space ~
17671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17673 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17683 \begin_inset Newline newline
17689 \begin_layout Itemize
17691 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17696 fonts use characters with serifs.
17697 These are the small
17698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17705 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17706 The following example shows the difference:
17707 \begin_inset Newline newline
17711 \begin_inset Newline newline
17716 text without serifs
17719 \begin_inset Newline newline
17722 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17723 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17730 \begin_layout Itemize
17732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17737 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17738 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17739 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17744 \begin_layout Standard
17746 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17754 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17755 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17758 \begin_inset space ~
17763 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17764 the property to be removed.
17765 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17766 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17767 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17785 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17786 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17794 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17798 \begin_inset space ~
17803 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17814 If you, for example, set
17815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17833 \begin_inset space ~
17838 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17847 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17852 \begin_layout Standard
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17857 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17858 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17861 \begin_layout Section
17862 Printing and Previewing
17865 \begin_layout Subsection
17869 \begin_layout Standard
17870 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17871 using \SpecialChar LyX
17872 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17873 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17874 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17875 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17877 Additional Features
17882 \begin_layout Standard
17884 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17887 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17888 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17889 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17892 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17893 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17894 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17895 to turn your writing into printable output.
17896 This happens in two stages:
17899 \begin_layout Enumerate
17900 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17901 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17903 a file with the extension,
17904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17918 \begin_layout Enumerate
17919 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17920 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17921 to use the commands in the
17925 file to produce printable output.
17928 \begin_layout Subsection
17929 Output file formats
17930 \begin_inset Index idx
17933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17942 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17951 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17953 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17957 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17961 \begin_inset Index idx
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17968 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17979 \begin_layout Standard
17980 This file type has the extension
17981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17993 It contains your document as plain text
17994 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17996 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17997 following the rules of the
17998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18001 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
18002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18010 \begin_layout Standard
18011 You can export your document to
18012 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
18014 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
18019 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18020 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18022 \begin_inset space ~
18028 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
18029 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
18030 bibliography (section
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18037 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
18042 If your document includes such material, use
18044 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18045 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18073 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
18074 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
18075 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
18077 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
18083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18086 \begin_inset Index idx
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
18099 \begin_layout Standard
18100 This file type has the extension
18101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18112 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18115 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
18116 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
18117 -Errors or to process it manually
18118 with console commands.
18119 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
18120 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
18121 's temporary directory whenever you
18122 view or export your document.
18125 \begin_layout Standard
18126 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18127 -file using the menu
18129 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18130 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18134 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
18135 export variants are explained in section
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18142 reference "subsec:Export"
18149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18151 \begin_inset Index idx
18154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18163 \begin_layout Standard
18164 This file type has the extension
18165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18185 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
18186 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
18187 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
18191 \begin_layout Standard
18192 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
18193 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
18194 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
18195 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
18196 when you view the DVI.
18197 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
18200 \begin_layout Standard
18201 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
18203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18204 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18209 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18210 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18212 \begin_inset space ~
18218 The latter option uses the program
18220 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18226 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18229 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18230 font access (see section
18231 \begin_inset space ~
18235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18237 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18242 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18243 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18250 \begin_inset Index idx
18253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 File formats ! PostScript
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18263 This file type has the extension
18264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18276 PostScript was developed by the company
18280 as a printer language.
18281 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
18283 PostScript can be seen as a
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18287 programming language
18288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18291 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
18295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18303 \begin_inset Index idx
18306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18308 packages ! pstricks
18318 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
18321 \begin_layout Standard
18322 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18326 Encapsulated PostScript
18327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18330 (EPS, file extension
18331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18343 As \SpecialChar LyX
18344 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
18345 convert them in the background to EPS.
18346 If, for example, you have 50
18347 \begin_inset space ~
18350 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18352 \begin_inset space ~
18355 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18356 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18358 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18359 EPS to avoid this problem.
18362 \begin_layout Standard
18363 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18365 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18366 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18374 \begin_inset Index idx
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 \begin_inset Index idx
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_layout Standard
18397 This file type has the extension
18398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18414 Portable Document Format
18415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18422 was derived from PostScript.
18423 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18432 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18433 looks exactly the same.
18436 \begin_layout Standard
18437 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18441 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18445 (JPG, file extension
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18473 Portable Network Graphics
18474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18477 (PNG, file extension
18478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18490 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18491 converts them in the
18492 background to one of these formats.
18493 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18494 will slow down your workflow.
18495 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18498 \begin_layout Standard
18499 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18507 \begin_layout Description
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18512 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18516 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18519 \begin_layout Description
18521 \begin_inset space ~
18528 ) This uses the program
18530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18533 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18536 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18539 is a new engine, derived from
18543 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18544 access (see section
18545 \begin_inset space ~
18549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18551 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18556 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18557 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18562 \begin_layout Description
18564 \begin_inset space ~
18571 ) This uses the program
18576 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18582 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18583 font access (see section
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18590 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18595 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18596 vertically written Japanese.
18599 \begin_layout Description
18601 \begin_inset space ~
18604 (cropped) This is the same as
18607 \begin_inset space ~
18612 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18613 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18614 to generate good-looking
18615 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18618 \begin_layout Description
18620 \begin_inset space ~
18623 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18627 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18631 \begin_layout Description
18633 \begin_inset space ~
18636 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18640 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18641 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18645 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18646 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18649 \begin_layout Standard
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18662 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18663 works without problems.
18664 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18665 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18669 \begin_inset space ~
18677 \begin_inset space ~
18682 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18692 \begin_inset Index idx
18695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 FileFormats ! XHTML
18702 \begin_inset Index idx
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 \begin_layout Standard
18715 This file type has the extension
18716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18728 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18729 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18730 When \SpecialChar LyX
18731 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18732 suitable for the purpose.
18733 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18736 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18739 between different formats, which are described in section
18741 Math Output in XHTML
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18754 \begin_layout Standard
18755 XHTML output remains
18756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18763 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18764 features are supported yet.
18768 and the World Wide Web
18772 Additional Features
18774 manual, for more information.
18777 \begin_layout Standard
18778 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18780 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18781 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18787 \begin_layout Subsection
18789 \begin_inset Index idx
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 \begin_layout Standard
18802 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18803 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18812 or use the toolbar button
18819 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18820 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18821 \begin_inset space ~
18825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18827 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18831 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18833 \begin_inset space ~
18837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18839 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18844 Further output formats can be selected via
18846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18847 View (Other Formats)
18849 or the toolbar button
18858 \begin_layout Standard
18859 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18860 viewer window using the menu
18862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18868 Update (Other Formats)
18873 \begin_layout Standard
18874 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18877 To have a real output, export your document.
18880 \begin_layout Section
18881 A few Words about Typography
18882 \begin_inset Index idx
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 \begin_layout Subsection
18895 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18896 \begin_inset Index idx
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18906 \begin_inset Index idx
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18919 In \SpecialChar LyX
18921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18932 symbol comes in four variants: the
18949 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18956 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18966 height_special "totalheight"
18971 backgroundcolor "none"
18974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 \begin_inset Tabular
18976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18977 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18978 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18979 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18980 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18981 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19010 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19050 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19073 system key combination
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19078 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
19081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19090 and the em dash with
19093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19106 is the Mac label for the right
19116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19129 <row interlinespace="3mm">
19130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 system key combination or
19153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 \begin_inset Formula $-$
19188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19219 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 Dashes can also be inserted with
19228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19233 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19241 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
19242 and 2014 for the en dash).
19245 \begin_layout Standard
19246 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
19247 mode and has a length of its own.
19248 Here are some examples:
19251 \begin_layout Enumerate
19252 line- and page-breaks
19253 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19263 \begin_layout Enumerate
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19269 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19279 \begin_layout Enumerate
19280 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
19281 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19291 \begin_layout Enumerate
19292 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19306 \begin_layout Standard
19308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19310 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19311 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19319 \begin_layout Subsection
19320 Dashes and Line Breaks
19321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19323 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
19332 case and locale, e.
19333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19339 \begin_layout Itemize
19340 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
19341 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19344 \begin_layout Itemize
19345 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
19349 \begin_layout Itemize
19350 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19351 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19354 \begin_layout Standard
19355 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19356 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19367 allows line breaks after hyphens
19368 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19370 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19373 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19376 \begin_layout Enumerate
19377 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19378 \begin_inset space ~
19381 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19383 The Elements of Typographic Style
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19389 – can be prevented using
19390 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
19392 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
19398 \begin_layout Enumerate
19399 Unwanted line breaks
19404 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19406 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19409 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 Prevent Hyphenation
19421 \begin_inset space ~
19437 in \SpecialChar TeX
19439 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19441 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
19443 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
19445 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19446 space does not suffice
19450 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19458 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19459 in the document language.
19460 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19474 \begin_layout Itemize
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19490 height_special "totalheight"
19495 backgroundcolor "none"
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 \begin_layout Itemize
19509 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19519 height_special "totalheight"
19524 backgroundcolor "none"
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset space ~
19537 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19538 \begin_inset space ~
19541 – sont très utiles.
19544 \begin_layout Itemize
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19562 \begin_layout Standard
19563 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19564 \begin_inset space ~
19567 – in contrast to an overfull line
19568 \begin_inset space ~
19571 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19575 \begin_layout Standard
19576 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19580 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19581 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19582 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19587 \begin_layout Enumerate
19588 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19589 They can be prevented using
19590 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
19592 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
19595 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19601 \begin_layout Itemize
19603 \begin_inset space ~
19606 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19607 \begin_inset space ~
19610 – sont très utiles.
19614 \begin_layout Enumerate
19615 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19616 \begin_inset Newline newline
19621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19622 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19624 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19626 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19634 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19636 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19638 \begin_inset space ~
19649 \begin_layout Itemize
19650 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19651 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19652 should be followed by
19653 a line break opportunity.
19656 \begin_layout Standard
19657 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19658 \begin_inset space ~
19662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19664 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19675 \begin_layout Enumerate
19676 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19677 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19678 or en dashes (see section
19679 \begin_inset space ~
19683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19685 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19696 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19699 \begin_layout Standard
19700 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19702 \begin_inset space ~
19705 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19706 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19715 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19716 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19724 \begin_layout Standard
19725 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19727 \begin_inset space ~
19730 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19732 prevents ligation to dashes.
19734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19741 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19746 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19747 after the input (unless the current text font is
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 The behavior was changed since
19757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19772 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19773 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19774 as non-breakable dashes.
19775 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19783 \begin_layout Standard
19786 \begin_inset space ~
19794 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19799 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19804 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19805 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19807 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19811 If you used both literal and
19812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19819 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19821 \begin_inset space ~
19824 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19825 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19828 \begin_layout Subsection
19830 \begin_inset Index idx
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19842 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19849 \begin_layout Standard
19850 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19851 but automatically in the output.
19852 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19858 \begin_inset Index idx
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 following the rules of the document language.
19870 does not hyphenate text in the
19874 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19877 \begin_layout Standard
19879 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19883 font and with unusual constructs, like
19884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19892 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19893 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19894 This is done with the menu
19896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19897 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19899 \begin_inset space ~
19905 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19907 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19911 \begin_layout Standard
19912 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19913 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 would then see the hyphen
19925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19932 as a line break possibility.
19933 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19934 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a
19935 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
19937 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
19942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19943 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19945 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
19947 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
19952 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19954 Prevent Hyphenation
19959 \begin_inset space ~
19967 \begin_layout Subsection
19969 \begin_inset Index idx
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19982 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19985 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19992 \begin_layout Standard
19993 When \SpecialChar LyX
19994 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19995 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19997 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
20000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20003 appropriate amount of space.
20004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20007 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
20009 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
20010 gets after another word.
20013 \begin_layout Standard
20014 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
20015 not work in all cases.
20017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20028 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
20029 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
20032 \begin_layout Standard
20033 Here are some examples of
20037 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20040 \begin_layout Itemize
20045 \begin_layout Itemize
20050 \begin_layout Standard
20051 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20054 \begin_layout Itemize
20056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20060 this is too much space!
20063 \begin_layout Itemize
20068 \begin_layout Standard
20069 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20072 \begin_layout Standard
20073 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
20076 \begin_layout Enumerate
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20085 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20086 \begin_inset space ~
20090 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
20092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20094 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20099 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
20101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20103 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
20110 \begin_inset Index idx
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 Spaces ! inter-word
20122 \begin_layout Enumerate
20126 \begin_inset space ~
20131 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20132 \begin_inset space ~
20136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20138 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20143 \begin_inset Index idx
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 \begin_layout Enumerate
20159 \begin_inset space ~
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20167 \begin_inset space ~
20174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20176 \begin_inset space ~
20181 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20182 This function is also bound to
20185 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20191 \begin_layout Standard
20192 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
20195 \begin_layout Itemize
20197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20201 \begin_inset space \space{}
20204 this is too much space!
20207 \begin_layout Itemize
20208 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20212 \begin_layout Standard
20213 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20214 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20216 will take care of this.
20219 \begin_layout Standard
20220 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20224 \begin_inset space ~
20230 feature described in the section
20232 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20237 Additional Features
20242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20244 \begin_inset Index idx
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 Typography ! Quotation marks
20254 \begin_inset Index idx
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 Quotation marks | see
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 \begin_layout Standard
20290 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20291 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
20292 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
20294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20302 The keyboard character,
20306 , generates this automatically.
20309 \begin_layout Standard
20310 You can specify what character the
20314 key produces by using the submenu
20320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20324 \begin_inset Index idx
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 Document ! Settings
20333 dialog and switching the
20337 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20338 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20340 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
20342 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
20346 \begin_inset space ~
20352 \begin_layout Labeling
20353 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20369 \begin_inset space ~
20373 \begin_inset Quotes els
20377 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20391 \begin_inset Quotes els
20395 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20398 quotation marks (as common, e.
20399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20405 \begin_layout Labeling
20406 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20409 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20413 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20417 \begin_inset space ~
20421 \begin_inset space ~
20425 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20429 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20435 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20439 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20443 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20447 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20450 quotation marks (as common, e.
20451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20457 \begin_layout Labeling
20458 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20461 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20465 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20481 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20487 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20491 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20495 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20499 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20502 quotation marks (as common, e.
20503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20509 \begin_layout Labeling
20510 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20513 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20517 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20521 \begin_inset space ~
20525 \begin_inset space ~
20529 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20533 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20539 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20543 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20547 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20551 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20554 quotation marks (as common, e.
20555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20561 \begin_layout Labeling
20562 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20565 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20569 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20573 \begin_inset space ~
20577 \begin_inset space ~
20581 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20585 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20591 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20595 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20599 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20603 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20606 quotation marks (as common, e.
20607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20610 g., in Switzerland)
20613 \begin_layout Labeling
20614 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20617 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20621 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20625 \begin_inset space ~
20629 \begin_inset space ~
20633 \begin_inset Quotes als
20637 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20643 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20647 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20651 \begin_inset Quotes als
20655 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20658 quotation marks (as common, e.
20659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20665 \begin_layout Labeling
20666 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20669 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20673 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20677 \begin_inset space ~
20681 \begin_inset space ~
20685 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20689 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20695 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20699 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20703 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20707 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20710 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20713 \begin_layout Labeling
20714 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20717 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20721 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20725 \begin_inset space ~
20729 \begin_inset space ~
20733 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20737 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20743 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20747 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20751 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20755 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20758 quotation marks (as common, e.
20759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20762 g., in Great Britain)
20765 \begin_layout Labeling
20766 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20769 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20773 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20781 \begin_inset space ~
20785 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20789 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20795 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20799 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20803 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20807 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20810 quotation marks (as common, e.
20811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20817 \begin_layout Labeling
20818 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20821 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20825 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20829 \begin_inset space ~
20833 \begin_inset space ~
20837 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20841 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20847 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20851 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20855 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20859 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20862 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20868 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20869 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20870 the inner marks differ).
20878 \begin_layout Labeling
20879 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20882 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20886 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20890 \begin_inset space ~
20894 \begin_inset space ~
20898 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20902 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20908 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20912 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20916 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20920 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20923 quotation marks (as common, e.
20924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20930 \begin_layout Labeling
20931 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20934 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20938 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20942 \begin_inset space ~
20946 \begin_inset space ~
20950 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20954 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20960 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20964 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20968 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20972 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20975 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20976 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20980 \begin_layout Labeling
20981 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20983 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20986 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20990 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20994 \begin_inset space ~
20998 \begin_inset space ~
21002 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21006 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21014 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21022 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21030 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21038 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21043 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21048 \begin_layout Labeling
21049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21050 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21058 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21068 \begin_inset space ~
21074 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21082 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21086 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21090 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21094 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21098 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21101 quotation marks (as common, e.
21102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
21112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21114 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21120 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
21121 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21129 \begin_layout Labeling
21130 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21131 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21139 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21145 \begin_inset space ~
21149 \begin_inset space ~
21155 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21163 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21167 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21171 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21175 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21179 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21182 quotation marks (as common, e.
21183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21186 g., in North Korea and China)
21187 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
21189 \begin_inset script superscript
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
21194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21196 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21211 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
21218 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21228 \begin_layout Standard
21229 Inner quotation marks
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
21235 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
21236 case (and specifically the British style shows that
21237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21244 does not necessarily mean
21245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21253 This is why we call them
21254 \begin_inset Quotes els
21258 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21274 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
21276 \begin_inset Quotes els
21280 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21283 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21286 arg "quote-insert inner"
21291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21297 \begin_layout Standard
21298 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21299 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
21300 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
21301 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21302 If you check the setting
21304 Use dynamic quotation marks
21308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21309 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21312 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21313 they appear in a special color).
21314 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21315 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
21317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21320 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
21323 \begin_layout Standard
21324 Individual quotation marks (i.
21325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21328 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
21329 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
21333 \begin_layout Subsection
21335 \begin_inset Index idx
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 Typography ! Ligatures
21345 \begin_inset Index idx
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21379 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21386 \begin_layout Standard
21387 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
21388 print them as single characters.
21389 These groups are known as
21394 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21395 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21397 Here are the standard ligatures:
21400 \begin_layout Itemize
21404 \begin_layout Itemize
21408 \begin_layout Itemize
21412 \begin_layout Itemize
21416 \begin_layout Itemize
21420 \begin_layout Standard
21421 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21424 \begin_layout Standard
21425 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21426 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21434 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21450 To break a ligature, use
21452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21453 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21473 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21490 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21498 \begin_layout Subsection
21500 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21502 \begin_inset Index idx
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 \begin_layout Standard
21518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21519 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21523 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21526 \begin_layout Description
21528 The name of the game.
21531 \begin_layout Description
21533 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21537 \begin_layout Description
21539 The \SpecialChar TeX
21540 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21544 \begin_layout Description
21545 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21546 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21550 \begin_layout Standard
21551 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21557 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21565 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21566 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21567 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21568 converges to the number
21569 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21572 : The actual version is
21573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21581 , the previous one was
21582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21593 \begin_layout Subsection
21595 \begin_inset Index idx
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 \begin_layout Standard
21608 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21609 space between two words.
21610 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21620 for units use the menu
21622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21623 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21625 \begin_inset space ~
21633 arg "space-insert thin"
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21640 Here is an example to show the differences:
21643 \begin_layout Standard
21644 \begin_inset Tabular
21645 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21646 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21647 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21648 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 \begin_inset space ~
21659 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 space between number and unit
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21687 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 half space between number and unit
21712 \begin_layout Subsection
21714 \begin_inset Index idx
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21726 \begin_layout Standard
21727 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21729 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21730 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21731 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21732 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21733 These bits of text became known as
21744 \begin_layout Standard
21745 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21746 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21747 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21748 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21749 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21750 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21751 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21752 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21753 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21754 \begin_inset Newline newline
21762 \begin_inset Newline newline
21770 \begin_inset Newline newline
21773 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21774 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21775 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21783 key "latexcompanion"
21789 \begin_inset space ~
21793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21800 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21801 's page break mechanism.
21804 \begin_layout Chapter
21805 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21808 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21815 \begin_layout Standard
21816 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21819 \begin_inset space ~
21825 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21828 \begin_layout Section
21830 \begin_inset Index idx
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21849 \begin_layout Standard
21851 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21854 \begin_layout Description
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21860 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21861 \begin_inset Newline newline
21865 \begin_inset Note Note
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21877 \begin_layout Description
21878 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21879 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21880 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21883 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21884 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21886 \begin_inset space ~
21892 \begin_inset Newline newline
21896 \begin_inset Note Comment
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21909 \begin_layout Description
21911 \begin_inset space ~
21914 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21915 set in the document settings under
21917 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21919 \begin_inset space ~
21925 \begin_inset Newline newline
21929 \begin_inset Newline newline
21933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21943 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21948 of a comment that appears in the output.
21954 \begin_inset Newline newline
21958 \begin_inset Newline newline
21961 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21964 \begin_layout Standard
21965 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21977 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21980 \begin_layout Section
21982 \begin_inset Index idx
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21994 name "sec:Footnotes"
22001 \begin_layout Standard
22003 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
22006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22009 or the toolbar button
22012 arg "footnote-insert"
22024 \begin_inset Graphics
22025 filename clipart/footnote.png
22034 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22035 's representation of your footnote.
22045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22064 label, the box will
22068 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22069 Clicking on the box label again will close
22082 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
22083 and click on the footnote
22098 \begin_layout Standard
22099 Here is an example footnote:
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
22116 \begin_layout Standard
22117 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
22118 position where the footnote box is placed.
22119 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22120 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22121 according to the document class.
22123 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
22124 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22130 ey are described in the
22133 \begin_inset space ~
22141 \begin_layout Section
22143 \begin_inset Index idx
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22155 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22162 \begin_layout Standard
22163 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22165 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22169 \begin_inset space ~
22174 or the toolbar button
22177 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22203 appearing within your text.
22204 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22205 's representation of your margin
22214 \begin_layout Standard
22215 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22219 \begin_inset Marginal
22222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 This is a marginal note.
22232 \begin_layout Standard
22233 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22234 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
22235 pages, right on odd pages.
22238 \begin_layout Standard
22239 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22242 \begin_inset space ~
22250 \begin_inset space ~
22258 \begin_layout Section
22259 Graphics and Images
22260 \begin_inset Index idx
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_inset Index idx
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22282 name "sec:Graphics"
22289 \begin_layout Standard
22290 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
22291 you want and click on the toolbar icon
22294 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22303 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22306 \begin_layout Standard
22307 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22312 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22313 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
22315 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22316 \begin_inset space ~
22320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22322 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22329 \begin_layout Standard
22334 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
22335 of the image in the output.
22336 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22340 \begin_inset space ~
22344 \begin_inset space ~
22353 \begin_inset space ~
22357 \begin_inset space ~
22361 \begin_inset space ~
22366 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22367 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
22375 \begin_layout Standard
22379 \begin_inset space ~
22383 \begin_inset space ~
22388 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22389 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22391 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22396 \begin_inset space ~
22401 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22402 with the image size is printed.
22405 \begin_layout Standard
22406 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22407 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22409 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22412 \begin_layout Standard
22414 \begin_inset Graphics
22415 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22423 \begin_layout Standard
22424 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22425 the image into a float, see section
22426 \begin_inset space ~
22430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22432 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22439 \begin_layout Subsection
22441 \begin_inset Index idx
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22453 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22460 \begin_layout Standard
22461 You can insert images in any known file format.
22462 But as we explained in section
22463 \begin_inset space ~
22467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22469 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22473 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22475 therefore uses the program
22479 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22480 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22481 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22482 \begin_inset space ~
22486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22488 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22495 \begin_layout Standard
22496 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22499 \begin_layout Description
22501 \begin_inset space ~
22504 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22505 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22506 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22510 Graphics Interchange Format
22511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22514 (GIF, file extension
22515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22527 \begin_inset Index idx
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22562 Portable Network Graphics
22563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22566 (PNG, file extension
22567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22579 \begin_inset Index idx
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22614 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22618 (JPG, file extension
22619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22643 \begin_inset Index idx
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 \begin_layout Description
22679 \begin_inset space ~
22682 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22684 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22685 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22686 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22687 \begin_inset Newline newline
22690 Scalable image formats can be
22691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22694 Scalable Vector Graphics
22695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22698 (SVG, file extension
22699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22711 \begin_inset Index idx
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22746 Encapsulated PostScript
22747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22750 (EPS, file extension
22751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22763 \begin_inset Index idx
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22798 Portable Document Format
22799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22802 (PDF, file extension
22803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22815 \begin_inset Index idx
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22833 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22834 result will not be scalable.
22835 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22849 \begin_layout Standard
22850 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22857 \begin_layout Subsection
22858 Grouping of Image Settings
22859 \begin_inset Index idx
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 Images ! Settings grouping
22871 \begin_layout Standard
22872 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22874 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22875 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22877 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22878 need to manually change each of them.
22881 \begin_layout Standard
22882 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22885 \begin_inset space ~
22889 \begin_inset space ~
22901 \begin_inset space ~
22905 \begin_inset space ~
22911 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22912 and checking the name of the desired group.
22915 \begin_layout Section
22917 \begin_inset Index idx
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22936 \begin_layout Standard
22937 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22940 arg "tabular-insert"
22945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22949 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22950 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22951 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22954 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22955 from the rest of the table.
22956 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22957 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22959 Here is an example table:
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22964 \begin_inset Tabular
22965 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22966 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22969 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22970 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
23168 \begin_layout Standard
23170 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
23171 This corresponds to the
23172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23179 table style listed in the style selection.
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23184 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
23185 Other available styles include:
23188 \begin_layout Itemize
23190 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
23192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23199 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
23203 \begin_layout Itemize
23205 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
23206 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23209 \begin_layout Itemize
23211 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
23213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23220 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
23221 bold top/bottom lines (see
23231 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
23232 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
23238 \begin_layout Standard
23240 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
23241 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
23242 button can be changed in
23244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23245 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23249 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
23253 \begin_layout Subsection
23257 \begin_layout Standard
23258 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
23261 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23265 This brings up the table dialog.
23266 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
23267 cursor is placed currently.
23268 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23269 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
23270 done on all of your selection.
23273 \begin_layout Standard
23274 In addition to the table dialog, the
23277 \begin_inset space ~
23282 helps you in setting table properties.
23283 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23286 \begin_layout Standard
23290 \begin_inset space ~
23295 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23296 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
23297 current cell respectively.
23298 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
23300 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
23301 of text, see section
23302 \begin_inset space ~
23306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23308 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23315 \begin_layout Standard
23316 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
23317 using the check box
23326 This will merge the cells to
23330 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
23331 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
23332 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23333 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
23334 in the last row without the upper border:
23337 \begin_layout Standard
23339 \begin_inset Tabular
23340 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23341 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23343 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23345 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 \begin_layout Standard
23477 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23478 -arguments for the table.
23479 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23480 explained in the chapter
23487 \begin_inset space ~
23493 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23494 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23495 but are visible in the output.
23498 \begin_layout Standard
23499 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 Most DVI-viewers are
23511 able to display rotations.
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23524 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23529 adds lines for all cell borders.
23532 \begin_layout Subsection
23534 \begin_inset Index idx
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23538 Tables ! Multi-page
23544 \begin_inset Index idx
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 \begin_layout Standard
23557 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23560 \begin_inset space ~
23564 \begin_inset space ~
23572 \begin_inset space ~
23577 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23578 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23581 \begin_layout Description
23586 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23587 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23588 Except for the first page, if
23591 \begin_inset space ~
23599 \begin_layout Description
23603 \begin_inset space ~
23608 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23609 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23612 \begin_layout Description
23617 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23618 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23619 except for the last page, if
23622 \begin_inset space ~
23630 \begin_layout Description
23634 \begin_inset space ~
23639 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23640 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23643 \begin_layout Description
23644 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23645 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23651 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23654 \begin_inset space ~
23662 \begin_layout Standard
23663 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23664 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23665 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23671 In this context, first means first in this order:
23674 \begin_inset space ~
23686 \begin_inset space ~
23691 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23694 \begin_layout Standard
23696 \begin_inset Tabular
23697 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23698 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23699 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23700 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23701 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23702 <row endfirsthead="true">
23703 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23714 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23723 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 <row endfirsthead="true">
23734 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <row endhead="true">
23767 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <row endhead="true">
23798 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <row endfoot="true">
23831 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24841 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25812 <row endlastfoot="true">
25813 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25824 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25833 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 \begin_layout Subsection
25852 \begin_inset Index idx
25855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25864 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25871 \begin_layout Standard
25872 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25873 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25874 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25875 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25879 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25882 \begin_layout Standard
25883 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25884 for the column in the table dialog.
25885 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25886 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25892 \begin_inset Tabular
25893 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25894 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25895 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25896 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25986 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 This is longer now.
26047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26099 This is longer now.
26104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 \begin_layout Standard
26131 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26132 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26137 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
26138 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26143 Selection with the mouse or with
26147 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26148 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
26149 the selection from outside the table.
26152 \begin_layout Section
26154 \begin_inset Index idx
26157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26173 \begin_layout Subsection
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26178 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
26179 have a fixed location.
26181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26188 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
26196 \begin_inset space ~
26201 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
26202 too many notes on the current page.
26205 \begin_layout Standard
26206 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26207 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
26208 and pages without text.
26209 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
26210 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
26211 Floats are therefore numbered.
26212 Referencing is described in section
26213 \begin_inset space ~
26217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26219 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 To insert a float, use the menu
26229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26233 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26234 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
26236 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26237 \begin_inset Index idx
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26246 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
26247 paragraph within the float.
26248 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26249 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
26250 left-clicking on the box label.
26251 A closed float box looks like this:
26252 \begin_inset Graphics
26253 filename clipart/float.png
26258 – a gray button with a red label.
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26262 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26264 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26267 \begin_layout Subsection
26269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26271 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26276 \begin_inset Index idx
26279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 Floats ! Figure floats
26288 \begin_layout Standard
26290 \begin_inset space ~
26294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26296 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26300 was created using the menu
26302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26303 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26309 arg "float-insert figure"
26313 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
26316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26322 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26326 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
26327 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26329 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26331 \begin_inset space ~
26339 arg "layout-paragraph"
26345 \begin_layout Standard
26346 \begin_inset Float figure
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 \begin_inset Graphics
26356 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26371 name "fig:A-star-in"
26388 \begin_layout Standard
26389 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
26390 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26392 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26401 ) and refer to it using the menu
26403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26409 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26413 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26414 vague references like
26415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26422 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26423 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26433 For more about cross-references, see section
26434 \begin_inset space ~
26438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26440 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26447 \begin_layout Standard
26448 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26449 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26450 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26451 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26452 as described in section
26453 \begin_inset space ~
26457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26459 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26465 \begin_inset space ~
26469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26471 reference "fig:Two-images"
26475 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26476 You can also set the images one below the other.
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26484 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26491 reference "fig:Star"
26495 are the subfigures.
26498 \begin_layout Standard
26499 \begin_inset Float figure
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26511 \begin_inset Float figure
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26519 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26524 name "fig:Undefinable"
26536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26537 \begin_inset Graphics
26538 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26550 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26554 \begin_inset Float figure
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 \begin_inset Graphics
26581 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26593 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26605 name "fig:Two-images"
26622 \begin_layout Subsection
26624 \begin_inset Index idx
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26628 Floats ! Table floats
26636 \begin_layout Standard
26637 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26640 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26643 or the toolbar button
26646 arg "float-insert table"
26650 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26651 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26652 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26654 \begin_inset space ~
26658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26660 reference "tab:Table-float"
26667 \begin_layout Standard
26668 \begin_inset Float table
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 name "tab:Table-float"
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26695 \begin_inset Tabular
26696 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26697 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26698 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26699 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26827 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26848 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26851 \end{array}\right]$
26859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26893 \begin_layout Subsection
26895 \begin_inset Index idx
26898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26909 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26910 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26911 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26913 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26921 \begin_inset space ~
26929 \begin_layout Section
26931 \begin_inset Index idx
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26943 \begin_layout Standard
26945 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26947 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26948 \begin_inset space \space{}
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26956 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26962 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26963 and its alignment within the page.
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26968 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26978 height_special "totalheight"
26983 backgroundcolor "none"
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 This is a minipage.
26990 The text is set in an italic style.
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26997 another formatting.
27005 \begin_layout Standard
27006 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27009 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
27013 as described in section
27014 \begin_inset space ~
27018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27020 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27025 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27032 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27042 height_special "totalheight"
27047 backgroundcolor "none"
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27051 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27052 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27058 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27062 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27072 height_special "totalheight"
27077 backgroundcolor "none"
27080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27081 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27082 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27097 \begin_layout Standard
27098 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
27100 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27107 \begin_inset space ~
27115 \begin_layout Chapter
27116 Mathematical Formulas
27117 \begin_inset Index idx
27120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27127 \begin_inset Index idx
27130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27161 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27168 \begin_layout Standard
27169 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27174 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27177 \begin_layout Section
27179 \begin_inset Index idx
27182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27191 \begin_layout Standard
27192 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
27205 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
27207 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
27208 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27209 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27217 \begin_layout Standard
27218 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
27222 \begin_inset space ~
27227 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27230 \begin_layout Standard
27231 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
27232 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
27235 \begin_layout Standard
27236 This is a line with an inline formula
27237 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
27245 paragraph, like this one:
27246 \begin_inset Formula
27253 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27256 \begin_layout Standard
27258 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27260 For example, typing
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27274 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
27275 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27279 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27282 \begin_inset space ~
27290 \begin_layout Subsection
27291 Navigating in Formulas
27292 \begin_inset Index idx
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27304 \begin_layout Standard
27305 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
27306 achieved with the arrow keys.
27308 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27309 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27314 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27315 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27319 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27323 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27326 \end{array}\right]$
27334 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
27339 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
27340 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27343 \begin_layout Standard
27348 , printed in this document as
27349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27353 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27360 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
27361 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
27362 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
27367 For example, if you want
27368 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27386 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27390 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27395 , since in the latter case only the
27398 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27403 will be under the square root sign:
27404 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27413 \begin_inset Formula
27415 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27424 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27425 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27428 \begin_layout Subsection
27432 \begin_layout Standard
27433 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27434 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27438 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27439 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27440 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27441 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27442 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27446 \begin_layout Subsection
27447 Exponents and Subscripts
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27458 \begin_inset Index idx
27461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27470 \begin_layout Standard
27471 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27474 arg "math-superscript"
27480 arg "math-subscript"
27483 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27485 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27488 , type in a formula
27491 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27501 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27507 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27511 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27517 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27523 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27532 , you have to use an extra
27536 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27537 For example, if you want
27538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27544 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27550 Subscripts are similar: To get
27551 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27557 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27565 \begin_layout Subsection
27567 \begin_inset Index idx
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 \begin_layout Standard
27580 Create a fraction either with the command
27586 or by using the icon
27589 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27601 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27602 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27603 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27608 To move back up, press
27613 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27614 \begin_inset Formula
27616 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27619 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27627 \begin_layout Subsection
27629 \begin_inset Index idx
27632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 Roots can be created using the
27645 \begin_inset space ~
27653 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27659 arg "math-insert \\root"
27681 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27687 always produces a square root.
27690 \begin_layout Subsection
27691 Operators with Limits
27692 \begin_inset Index idx
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27702 \begin_inset Index idx
27705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27714 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27721 \begin_layout Standard
27723 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27727 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27730 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27731 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27732 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27733 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27734 The sum operator will automatically place its
27735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27742 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27744 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27748 \begin_inset Formula
27750 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27755 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27762 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27763 behind the operator and using the menu
27765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27766 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27768 \begin_inset space ~
27772 \begin_inset space ~
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27796 \begin_inset Index idx
27799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 \begin_inset Formula
27808 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27813 which will place the
27814 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27826 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27827 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27833 \begin_layout Standard
27834 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27841 Have a look at section
27842 \begin_inset space ~
27846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27848 reference "subsec:Functions"
27852 for an explanation of function macros.
27855 \begin_layout Subsection
27857 \begin_inset Index idx
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27870 Most math symbols can be found in the
27873 \begin_inset space ~
27878 under one of several categories; including
27895 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27899 \begin_layout Standard
27900 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27901 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27902 don't have to use the
27905 \begin_inset space ~
27910 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27912 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27915 \begin_layout Subsection
27917 \begin_inset Index idx
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 \begin_layout Standard
27930 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27936 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27942 \begin_inset space ~
27950 arg "math-insert \\space"
27954 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27955 For example, the sequence
27960 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27963 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27965 \begin_inset Graphics
27966 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27971 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27972 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27973 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27974 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27975 , because they are negative
27977 Here are two examples:
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27990 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27996 \begin_layout Standard
28006 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28012 \begin_layout Subsection
28014 \begin_inset Index idx
28017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28026 name "subsec:Functions"
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28037 \begin_inset space ~
28042 contains under the button
28045 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28048 a number of function macros, such as
28049 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28053 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28061 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28068 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
28069 avoid confusions, because
28070 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28074 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28083 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28087 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28093 \begin_layout Standard
28094 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
28095 are placed, as described in section
28096 \begin_inset space ~
28100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28102 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28109 \begin_layout Subsection
28111 \begin_inset Index idx
28114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 \begin_layout Standard
28124 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
28126 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
28127 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28128 commands, for example, to enter
28129 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28132 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28133 Our example is entered by typing
28138 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28145 \begin_inset space ~
28149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28151 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28155 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28159 \begin_inset Float table
28166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28167 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28172 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28176 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 \begin_inset Tabular
28187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28275 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28329 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28383 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28545 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28653 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28773 \begin_layout Standard
28774 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28777 \begin_inset space ~
28785 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28788 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28792 \begin_layout Section
28793 Brackets and Delimiters
28794 \begin_inset Index idx
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28804 \begin_inset Index idx
28807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28816 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28823 \begin_layout Standard
28824 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28826 For some purposes, using just the keys
28831 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28832 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28833 toolbar delimiter icon
28836 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28840 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28841 \begin_inset Formula
28843 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28851 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28852 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28856 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28859 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28865 \begin_inset Formula
28867 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28875 \begin_layout Standard
28876 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28877 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28881 \begin_layout Standard
28882 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28883 left side and right side.
28884 If you use the option
28887 \begin_inset space ~
28892 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28893 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28895 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28900 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28901 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28904 \begin_layout Standard
28905 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28906 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28907 is to go inside the brackets.
28908 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28913 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28914 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28915 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28919 arg "math-delim ( )"
28925 \begin_layout Section
28926 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28927 \begin_inset Index idx
28930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28937 \begin_inset Index idx
28940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28947 \begin_inset Index idx
28950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28951 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28972 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28976 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28977 Here is an example:
28978 \begin_inset Formula
28980 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28989 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28990 \begin_inset space ~
28994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28996 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29001 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
29002 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
29003 This alignment is set in the box
29008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29057 for every column as default.
29058 For example, the sequence
29059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29070 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
29071 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
29072 corresponds to the relevant column.
29073 The result will look like this:
29074 \begin_inset Formula
29077 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29078 column & has & has\,right\\
29079 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29088 \begin_layout Standard
29089 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29092 arg "newline-insert newline"
29095 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29096 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29098 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 or the math toolbar.
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29105 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
29106 It can be created with the menu
29108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29109 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29111 \begin_inset space ~
29123 Here is an example:
29124 \begin_inset Formula
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29139 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29142 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29145 arg "newline-insert newline"
29149 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
29154 arg "newline-insert newline"
29157 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29165 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
29166 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
29167 A new row is created by every further entry of
29170 arg "newline-insert newline"
29174 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29175 Here is an example:
29176 \begin_inset Formula
29178 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29179 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29184 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
29185 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29186 \begin_inset Formula
29188 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29204 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29205 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29208 reference "eq:asquared"
29213 The other types are described in section
29214 \begin_inset space ~
29218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29220 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29227 \begin_layout Section
29228 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29229 \begin_inset Index idx
29232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29233 Math ! Formula numbering
29239 \begin_inset Index idx
29242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29243 Math ! Referencing formulas
29249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29251 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29261 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29262 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29264 \begin_inset space ~
29268 \begin_inset space ~
29276 arg "math-number-toggle"
29280 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29281 within parentheses.
29282 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29283 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
29284 the document class.
29285 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29286 separated by a dot:
29287 \begin_inset Formula
29297 arg "math-number-toggle"
29300 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29301 You can only number displayed formulas.
29304 \begin_layout Standard
29305 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
29307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29308 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29310 \begin_inset space ~
29314 \begin_inset space ~
29322 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29325 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29326 \begin_inset Formula
29329 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29335 To number all lines use the shortcut
29338 arg "math-number-toggle"
29344 \begin_layout Standard
29345 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29348 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29349 A label is inserted with the menu
29351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29360 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29361 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29362 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29374 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
29375 label type when you have many labels in your document.
29376 We inserted in the following example the label
29377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29384 in the second line:
29385 \begin_inset Formula
29387 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29388 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29393 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29394 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29395 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29399 \begin_inset space ~
29407 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29411 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29412 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29413 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29414 as the formula number:
29417 \begin_layout Standard
29418 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29421 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29429 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29430 's cross-reference box are described in section
29431 \begin_inset space ~
29435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29437 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29442 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29450 \begin_layout Section
29451 User defined math macros
29452 \begin_inset Index idx
29455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29466 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29467 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29468 Math macros are explained in section
29471 \begin_inset space ~
29483 \begin_layout Section
29487 \begin_layout Subsection
29489 \begin_inset Index idx
29492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29501 \begin_layout Standard
29502 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29503 To set a font in a formula, use the
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29514 arg "math-insert \\font"
29517 , or enter its command, listed in table
29518 \begin_inset space ~
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29524 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29531 \begin_layout Standard
29532 \begin_inset Float table
29539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29540 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29545 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29549 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 \begin_inset Tabular
29560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29561 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29595 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29622 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29649 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29682 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29709 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29731 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29737 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29738 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29751 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29767 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29801 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29823 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29829 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29837 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29850 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29866 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29909 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29912 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29914 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29918 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29939 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29944 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a
29945 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
29947 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
29950 space when you need a space in the box.
29951 Here is an example where
29952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29963 denotes the set of numbers:
29964 \begin_inset Formula
29966 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29975 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29976 You can, for example, put a character in
29985 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29989 \begin_inset Newline newline
29992 So it is better not to use this feature.
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29997 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30001 \begin_inset Newline newline
30004 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30010 , which works like the other typeface commands:
30011 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30024 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
30027 \begin_layout Standard
30028 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
30030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30031 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30033 \begin_inset space ~
30041 \begin_layout Subsection
30043 \begin_inset Index idx
30046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30056 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
30058 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
30062 \begin_inset space ~
30066 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30082 arg "math-insert \\font"
30086 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30087 in black instead of blue.
30088 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30089 Here is an example:
30090 \begin_inset Formula
30093 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30094 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30103 \begin_layout Subsection
30105 \begin_inset Index idx
30108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30117 \begin_layout Standard
30118 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
30119 automatically chosen in most situations.
30137 For most characters,
30145 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
30146 and certain other structures, are set larger in
30151 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
30152 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30153 thinks are appropriate.
30154 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30157 arg "math-insert \\style"
30161 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30162 For example, you can set
30163 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30166 , which is normally in
30175 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30179 The four styles are used in the following example:
30182 \begin_layout Standard
30183 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30187 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30191 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30195 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
30203 is set in a particular size with the menu
30205 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30207 \begin_inset space ~
30212 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30213 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
30214 will be adjusted to correspond.
30215 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30226 \begin_layout Standard
30230 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30236 \begin_layout Section
30237 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30239 \begin_inset Index idx
30242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30249 \begin_inset Index idx
30252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30263 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
30264 that are in common use.
30267 \begin_layout Subsection
30268 Enabling AMS-Support
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30272 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
30274 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
30290 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
30291 selecting the checkbox
30294 \begin_inset space ~
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30302 \begin_inset space ~
30311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30315 \begin_inset Index idx
30318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30319 Document ! Settings
30327 \begin_inset space ~
30333 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30334 -errors in formulas,
30335 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30338 \begin_layout Subsection
30340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30342 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30347 \begin_inset Index idx
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30351 Math ! Multi-line Equations
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30361 provides a selection of different formula types.
30363 allows you to choose between
30384 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
30385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30392 , for an explanation of these formula types.
30395 \begin_layout Chapter
30399 \begin_layout Section
30401 \begin_inset Index idx
30404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30413 name "sec:Cross-References"
30420 \begin_layout Standard
30421 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30422 's strengths is cross-references.
30423 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30425 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30426 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30427 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30430 \begin_layout Enumerate
30434 \begin_layout Enumerate
30435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30437 name "enu:Second-item"
30444 \begin_layout Enumerate
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30449 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30454 or by pressing the toolbar button
30461 A gray label box like this:
30462 \begin_inset Graphics
30463 filename clipart/label.png
30467 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30469 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30504 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30505 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30527 or the toolbar button
30530 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30534 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30535 \begin_inset Graphics
30536 filename clipart/reference.png
30540 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30542 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30555 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 As an alternative to
30562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30565 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30570 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30571 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30587 \begin_inset space ~
30591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30593 reference "enu:Second-item"
30600 \begin_layout Standard
30601 It is recommended to use a
30602 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
30604 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 described in section
30613 \begin_inset space ~
30617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30619 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30628 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30629 line breaks between them.
30632 \begin_layout Standard
30633 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30636 \begin_layout Description
30637 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30640 reference "fig:Two-images"
30647 \begin_layout Description
30648 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30649 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30661 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30668 \begin_layout Description
30669 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30670 \begin_inset space ~
30674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30675 LatexCommand pageref
30676 reference "fig:Two-images"
30683 \begin_layout Description
30685 \begin_inset space ~
30689 \begin_inset space ~
30692 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30694 LatexCommand vpageref
30695 reference "fig:Two-images"
30700 \begin_inset Newline newline
30703 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30704 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30705 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30706 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30707 it prints “on the next page”.
30708 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30711 \begin_layout Description
30713 \begin_inset space ~
30717 \begin_inset space ~
30721 \begin_inset space ~
30724 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30727 reference "fig:Two-images"
30732 \begin_inset Newline newline
30735 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30741 ; otherwise it behaves like
30745 \begin_inset space ~
30749 \begin_inset space ~
30758 \begin_layout Description
30760 \begin_inset space ~
30763 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30764 \begin_inset Newline newline
30768 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30776 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30786 \begin_inset Index idx
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 packages ! prettyref
30797 \begin_inset Index idx
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30802 packages ! refstyle
30813 \begin_inset Newline newline
30816 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30817 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30820 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30825 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30833 is the default and preferred because
30837 supports only English documents.
30838 The format is specified by using the command
30842 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30851 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30852 preamble of the document.
30853 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30871 \begin_inset Newline newline
30878 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30883 \begin_inset Newline newline
30894 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30895 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30897 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30898 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30903 , you might do so as follows:
30904 \begin_inset Newline newline
30911 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30912 format{prop}{Proposition
30917 \begin_inset Newline newline
30920 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30921 the package documentation
30922 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30924 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30930 \begin_inset Newline newline
30941 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30948 \begin_layout Description
30950 \begin_inset space ~
30953 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30955 LatexCommand nameref
30956 reference "fig:Two-images"
30963 \begin_layout Description
30965 \begin_inset space ~
30968 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30969 label for the reference:
30970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30971 LatexCommand labelonly
30972 reference "fig:Two-images"
30977 \begin_inset Newline newline
30980 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30981 Code, if you want to issue a command
30982 that \SpecialChar LyX
30988 , then you may want to use the
30991 \begin_inset space ~
30996 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31006 This is the form needed for e.
31007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31011 \begin_inset space \space{}
31018 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
31019 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31021 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31025 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
31029 \begin_layout Standard
31030 You can only use the style
31034 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
31038 is always possible.
31041 \begin_layout Standard
31042 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
31043 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
31045 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31046 \begin_inset space ~
31050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31052 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31059 \begin_layout Standard
31060 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31073 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
31074 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
31075 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
31078 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31081 \begin_inset space ~
31086 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31087 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31090 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31094 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
31095 or, using the menu:
31097 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31098 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31106 \begin_layout Standard
31107 You can change labels at any time.
31108 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
31110 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
31112 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
31113 change them all manually
31118 \begin_layout Standard
31119 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31121 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
31125 \begin_layout Standard
31126 References are described in detail in the section
31137 \begin_layout Section
31138 Table of Contents and other Listings
31139 \begin_inset Index idx
31142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31149 \begin_inset Index idx
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31153 Navigating ! Outline
31159 \begin_inset Index idx
31162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31178 \begin_layout Subsection
31180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31182 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31189 \begin_layout Standard
31190 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31193 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31195 \begin_inset space ~
31199 \begin_inset space ~
31205 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31207 If you click on it, the
31211 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
31212 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31213 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31215 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31217 \begin_inset space ~
31222 that is described in section
31223 \begin_inset space ~
31227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31229 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31237 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31238 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
31240 \begin_inset space ~
31244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31246 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31250 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
31252 \begin_inset space ~
31256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31258 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
31262 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
31264 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
31267 \begin_layout Subsection
31268 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
31269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31271 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
31278 \begin_layout Standard
31279 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
31281 You can insert them via the
31283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31284 List/Contents/References
31287 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
31290 \begin_layout Section
31291 URLs and Hyperlinks
31292 \begin_inset Index idx
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31302 \begin_inset Index idx
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 \begin_layout Subsection
31316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31325 \begin_layout Standard
31326 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
31328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
31337 \begin_inset Flex URL
31340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31342 https://www.lyx.org
31350 \begin_layout Standard
31351 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
31357 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
31361 \begin_layout Standard
31362 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31370 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
31379 \begin_layout Subsection
31381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31383 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
31390 \begin_layout Standard
31391 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
31393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31396 or with the toolbar button
31403 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31412 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31413 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31416 name "LyX's homepage"
31417 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31422 , an Email address like this:
31423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31425 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31426 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31432 , or a link to a file.
31437 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31445 \begin_layout Standard
31446 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31459 to the link target.
31462 \begin_layout Standard
31463 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31464 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31465 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31466 the text style dialog.
31467 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31473 name "LyX's homepage"
31474 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31487 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31494 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31496 \begin_inset Newline newline
31504 \begin_inset Newline newline
31511 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31512 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31516 \begin_layout Section
31518 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31520 \begin_inset Index idx
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31532 name "sec:Counters"
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31541 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31542 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31543 is its ability to manage counters.
31544 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31545 modify counters directly.
31546 This can be done in
31547 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
31549 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
31552 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31553 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
31554 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31560 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31561 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31562 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31563 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31564 to set the section counter to four.
31571 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31572 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31573 These effects can also be limited to
31574 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
31576 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
31579 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31581 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
31582 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
31584 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
31587 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31593 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31594 There are five commands you can use:
31597 \begin_layout Enumerate
31599 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31604 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31607 \begin_layout Enumerate
31609 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31614 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
31615 you choose a negative number)
31618 \begin_layout Enumerate
31620 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31625 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31628 \begin_layout Enumerate
31630 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31633 Save value of counter:
31635 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
31638 \begin_layout Enumerate
31640 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31643 Restore value of counter:
31645 Restores the previously saved value.
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31650 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31651 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31652 those that are available in the current document class.
31657 \begin_layout Section
31659 \begin_inset Index idx
31662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31671 name "sec:Appendices"
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 Appendices are created with the menu
31681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31693 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31694 as the appendix part of the book.
31695 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31698 \begin_layout Standard
31699 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31700 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31701 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31702 and the subsection number.
31703 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset space ~
31713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31715 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31729 reference "subsec:Export"
31736 \begin_layout Section
31738 \begin_inset Index idx
31741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31750 name "sec:Bibliography"
31757 \begin_layout Standard
31758 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31760 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31767 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31774 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31779 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31780 \begin_inset space ~
31784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31786 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31791 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31792 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31793 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31797 using a bibliography database.
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31801 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31802 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31806 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31807 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31808 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31809 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31810 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31813 \begin_layout Subsection
31814 The Bibliography Environment
31815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31817 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31824 \begin_layout Standard
31829 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31831 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31840 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31842 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31843 of ASCII characters only.
31847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31852 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31858 \begin_inset Newline newline
31862 \begin_inset Flex URL
31865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31867 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31877 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31887 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31888 \begin_inset Newline newline
31895 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31896 the number of the entry.
31901 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31910 \begin_layout Standard
31911 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31916 or the toolbar button
31919 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31923 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31924 containing the available citations.
31925 Select one or more keys from the list and
31935 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31936 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31940 \begin_layout Standard
31941 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31942 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31943 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31955 \begin_layout Standard
31959 Companion Second Edition
31962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31964 key "latexcompanion"
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 The \SpecialChar LyX
31974 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31975 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31985 \begin_layout Standard
31986 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31993 \begin_inset Index idx
31996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32005 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
32006 the label needs to be given the form
32007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32018 Author A and Author B(Year)
32019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32026 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
32033 \begin_inset space ~
32038 in the document settings
32039 \begin_inset Index idx
32042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32043 Document ! Settings
32050 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32060 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32068 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
32070 Once you have done that, the
32073 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
32075 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
32078 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32095 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
32096 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
32097 These two are madatory.
32098 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
32101 Baker, Jones, and Williams
32103 ) and in abrreviated form (
32110 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
32111 add the abbreviated form to
32115 and the full list to the optional
32123 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
32124 If specified like this,
32126 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
32127 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
32130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32137 is specified, toggling
32138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32145 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
32146 full and abbreviated list
32150 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
32151 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
32152 the citation references.
32153 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
32158 \begin_layout Standard
32159 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
32162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32164 \begin_inset space ~
32172 arg "layout-paragraph"
32176 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
32179 \begin_layout Subsection
32180 Bibliography databases
32181 \begin_inset Index idx
32184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32185 Bibliography ! Databases
32191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32193 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32200 \begin_layout Standard
32201 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
32206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32207 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
32209 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
32210 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
32215 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
32217 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
32218 your working field in a database.
32219 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
32220 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
32221 list for that document.
32222 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32227 The database is a text file with the file extension
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32239 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
32240 The format is explained in
32241 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32248 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32252 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
32258 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
32259 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
32260 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
32262 \begin_inset Flex URL
32265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32267 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32277 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
32278 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32279 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
32281 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
32283 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
32284 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
32285 Those are addressed by
32290 \begin_inset Index idx
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32295 packages ! biblatex
32301 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32302 (although it has been significantly
32303 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32313 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32314 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32315 might conversely fail to correctly
32316 handle databases that use specific
32325 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
32329 \begin_layout Standard
32330 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32335 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
32337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32341 \begin_inset Index idx
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32345 Document ! Settings
32357 \begin_inset space ~
32362 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32371 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32373 \begin_inset Index idx
32376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32387 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32391 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32393 \begin_inset space ~
32399 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
32400 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32408 Add bibliography to TOC
32410 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
32415 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
32416 in the document or just the cited references.
32418 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
32423 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
32424 differ from the encoding of the document.
32429 \begin_layout Standard
32430 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32431 style file is a text file with the file extension
32432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32443 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32444 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32445 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32446 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32448 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32454 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32455 \begin_inset Newline newline
32459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32461 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32471 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32476 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32480 \begin_layout Standard
32481 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32486 \begin_inset Index idx
32489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32490 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32496 \begin_inset Index idx
32499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32501 packages ! biblatex
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32510 Accessing a database via
32514 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32516 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
32518 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
32523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32524 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32526 \begin_inset space ~
32532 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32533 you cannot select a
32538 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32542 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32545 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32546 As for the styles, note the following.
32551 \begin_layout Standard
32556 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32569 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32570 file (text file with the file extension
32571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32582 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32583 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32585 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32594 styles are not set in the
32597 \begin_inset space ~
32602 dialog, but in the document settings.
32603 \begin_inset Index idx
32606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32607 Document ! Settings
32612 However, in the dialog in the
32616 field, which is only visible if you use
32620 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32621 example how its heading will appear).
32622 These options are described in detail in the
32627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32638 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32639 \begin_inset space ~
32643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32645 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32656 Bibliography Processors
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32660 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32661 uses a bibliography processor,
32662 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32663 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32664 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32666 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32667 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32670 \begin_layout Standard
32671 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32673 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32674 You can do this on a general level in
32676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32677 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32678 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32681 or for individual documents in
32683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32684 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32688 The following variants are available by default:
32691 \begin_layout Description
32692 biber a specific, modern processor
32693 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 developed exclusively for
32707 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32713 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32718 makes use of; if you use the
32722 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32729 \begin_layout Description
32730 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32731 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32732 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32736 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32739 \begin_layout Description
32740 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32741 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32745 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32749 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32753 features are supported.
32756 \begin_layout Standard
32757 By default (with the
32763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32777 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32778 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32779 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32782 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32783 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32796 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32797 -based bibliography styles).
32798 This should suit most needs.
32801 \begin_layout Standard
32802 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32803 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32804 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32809 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32810 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32811 You can adjust it in
32813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32815 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32821 \begin_layout Standard
32822 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32823 can add below the selection.
32824 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32825 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32845 \begin_layout Standard
32847 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32849 These are explained in detail in section
32851 Customizing Bibliographies
32855 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32860 Additional Features
32863 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
32867 \begin_layout Subsection
32869 \begin_inset Index idx
32872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32873 Bibliography ! Citation format
32879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32881 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32889 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32894 \begin_inset space \space{}
32897 numerical citation (as
32898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32905 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32913 ) or author-year citations (as
32914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32923 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32928 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32936 \begin_inset Index idx
32939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32940 Document ! Settings
32945 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32951 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32952 labels, is there to use
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32971 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32974 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32981 \begin_layout Standard
32982 With a bibliography database (see
32983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32985 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32992 ) one has in contrary to the
32996 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32997 These style formats are available:
33000 \begin_layout Description
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33005 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33006 -based approached without any additional packages
33007 (simple numeric citations).
33010 \begin_layout Description
33011 Biblatex loads the package
33016 \begin_inset Index idx
33019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 packages ! biblatex
33026 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
33028 Biblatex citation style
33032 Biblatex bibliography style
33035 Options to the package
33039 can be entered in the
33046 \begin_layout Description
33048 \begin_inset space ~
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33055 mode) loads the package
33059 with the natbib compatibility mode.
33060 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
33072 behavior very closely.
33077 this option has some additional styles.
33082 styles are also supported by this variant.
33085 \begin_layout Description
33087 \begin_inset space ~
33090 (BibTeX) loads the package
33095 \begin_inset Index idx
33098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33105 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
33108 \begin_layout Description
33110 \begin_inset space ~
33113 (BibTeX) loads the package
33118 \begin_inset Index idx
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33140 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
33142 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
33151 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
33153 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
33154 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
33156 Biblatex citation style
33159 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
33165 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33170 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
33171 are available in the
33176 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
33177 a name prefix such as
33178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33193 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
33194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33198 \begin_inset space \space{}
33202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33214 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
33216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33220 \begin_inset space \space{}
33223 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
33225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33229 \begin_inset space \space{}
33233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33245 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33257 \begin_inset space ~
33263 Here is a simple example where the text
33264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33268 \begin_inset space ~
33272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33275 appears after the reference:
33278 \begin_layout Quote
33280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33283 key "latexcompanion"
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 All styles except for
33296 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
33298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33306 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
33310 \begin_layout Standard
33311 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
33312 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
33313 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
33318 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
33319 multi-citation (so-called
33320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33323 qualified citation lists
33324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33330 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
33335 dialog will display three columns in the field
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33350 \begin_inset space ~
33358 \begin_inset space ~
33364 If you double-click on an item's
33367 \begin_inset space ~
33375 \begin_inset space ~
33380 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
33383 General text before
33389 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
33392 \begin_layout Subsection
33394 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
33395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33397 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
33401 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
33405 \begin_layout Standard
33407 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
33409 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
33412 \begin_inset space ~
33416 \begin_inset space ~
33420 \begin_inset space ~
33424 \begin_inset space ~
33427 Content\SpecialChar ldots
33430 context menu if specific conditions are met:
33433 \begin_layout Itemize
33435 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33436 If citation entries include any of the fields
33437 \begin_inset Flex Code
33440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33442 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33451 \begin_inset Flex Code
33454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33464 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33465 \begin_inset Flex Code
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33470 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33478 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33479 \begin_inset Flex Code
33482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33484 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33492 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33495 \begin_layout Itemize
33497 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33498 If citation entries include any of the fields
33499 \begin_inset Flex Code
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33504 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33512 (filled by JabRef) or
33513 \begin_inset Flex Code
33516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33518 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33526 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33527 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33528 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33531 \begin_layout Standard
33533 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33534 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33535 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33538 Search drive for cited files
33542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33543 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33544 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33549 It uses the tokens supplied at
33553 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33554 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
33555 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
33557 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
33559 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33560 of the file (at arbitrary position).
33562 opens the first matching file it finds.
33563 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33564 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33565 the chance this works for you.
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33572 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33573 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33574 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33576 \begin_inset Flex Code
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33581 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33590 \begin_inset Flex Code
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33603 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
33605 Customization manual
33610 Cite format description
33617 \begin_layout Section
33619 \begin_inset Index idx
33622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33638 \begin_layout Standard
33639 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33648 or the toolbar button
33655 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33656 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33657 by \SpecialChar LyX
33658 as the index entry.
33661 \begin_layout Standard
33662 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33665 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33673 A light blue box labeled
33674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33685 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33686 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33692 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33693 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33694 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33698 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33706 \begin_layout Subsection
33707 Grouping Index Entries
33708 \begin_inset Index idx
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33721 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33723 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33724 lists under the entry
33725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33733 First we create the entry
33734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33742 \begin_inset space ~
33746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33748 reference "subsec:Lists"
33753 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33760 reference "sec:Itemize"
33764 , we insert the command
33767 \begin_layout Standard
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33777 \begin_layout Standard
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33784 for the enumerated list in section
33785 \begin_inset space ~
33789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33791 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33798 \begin_layout Standard
33799 The exclamation mark
33800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33807 marks the grouping levels.
33808 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33809 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33810 If we don't have an index entry for
33811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33818 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33821 \begin_layout Subsection
33823 \begin_inset Index idx
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33827 Index ! Page ranges
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33836 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33838 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33839 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33840 an index entry in section
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33847 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33854 \begin_layout Standard
33857 Paragraph environments|(
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 and another entry at the end of section
33862 \begin_inset space ~
33866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33868 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33878 Paragraph environments|)
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33906 respectively start and end the index range.
33907 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33908 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33909 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33910 An example is the index entry
33911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33914 Document ! Settings
33915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33921 \begin_layout Subsection
33923 \begin_inset Index idx
33926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 Index ! Cross referencing
33935 \begin_layout Standard
33936 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33937 We referred for example in the index entry
33938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33946 \begin_inset space ~
33950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33952 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33956 ) to the index entry
33957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33964 in the same section using the entry
33967 \begin_layout Standard
33970 GIF|see{Image formats}
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33976 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33977 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33980 \begin_layout Subsection
33982 \begin_inset Index idx
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33986 Index ! Entry order
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33996 follow the rules for the index order.
33997 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34003 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34011 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
34020 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
34021 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
34022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34046 \begin_inset Index idx
34049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34050 Dummy entries ! maïs
34056 \begin_inset Index idx
34059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 Dummy entries ! maître
34066 \begin_inset Index idx
34069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34070 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
34075 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
34076 maïs, maison, maître.
34077 To achieve this, we use the command
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34083 previous entry@current entry
34086 \begin_layout Standard
34087 In our case we want to have
34088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34103 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
34106 \begin_layout Standard
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34113 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
34114 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
34116 See the next subsection for an example.
34119 \begin_layout Subsection
34121 \begin_inset Index idx
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 Index ! Entry layout
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
34135 \begin_inset Index idx
34138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34141 This is an italic dummy entry
34146 You can also format the page number using the character
34147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34154 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34155 -command without a backslash.
34156 We can write for example
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34162 italic page number:|textit
34165 \begin_layout Standard
34166 to get the page number in italic.
34167 \begin_inset Index idx
34170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34171 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
34176 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
34177 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
34179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34201 Have a look at section
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34208 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34212 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34225 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
34229 to generate the index, see section
34230 \begin_inset space ~
34234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34236 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
34245 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
34250 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
34251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34254 key "latexcompanion"
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34268 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
34270 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
34271 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
34272 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
34273 If so, put the following in the preamble
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34292 \begin_layout Standard
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 in the index entry.
34300 \begin_inset Index idx
34303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34304 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
34309 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
34310 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
34311 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
34314 \begin_layout Standard
34315 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
34316 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
34317 a bold font for all index entries.
34318 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
34330 documentation for details,
34331 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34333 key "makeindex,xindy"
34341 \begin_layout Subsection
34343 \begin_inset Index idx
34346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34355 name "subsec:Index-Program"
34362 \begin_layout Standard
34363 If the index generation program
34367 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
34368 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
34372 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34373 distribution, is used.
34377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34382 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
34383 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
34384 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
34385 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
34386 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
34396 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
34398 dialog, see section
34399 \begin_inset space ~
34403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34405 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34410 The available options are listed and explained in
34411 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34413 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
34419 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
34425 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
34428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34433 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
34434 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
34437 \begin_layout Subsection
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34442 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34443 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34451 next to the standard index.
34453 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34454 that add this feature.
34461 \begin_inset Index idx
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34466 packages ! splitidx
34471 package to generate multiple indexes.
34472 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34478 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34488 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34489 style, but it also includes
34490 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34491 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34501 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34507 and select the option
34509 Use multiple Indexes
34516 already contains the standard index
34517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34525 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34526 also appear as a heading) to the
34530 input field and press the
34535 The new index now also appears in the list.
34536 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34537 label color to the new index.
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34545 List/Contents/References
34551 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34552 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34553 are additional features:
34556 \begin_layout Itemize
34557 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34558 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34561 \begin_layout Itemize
34562 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34563 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34568 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34569 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34570 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34571 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34574 \begin_layout Itemize
34579 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34580 code in the name of the index.
34583 \begin_layout Section
34584 Nomenclature/Glossary
34585 \begin_inset Index idx
34588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34595 \begin_inset Index idx
34598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34629 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34636 \begin_layout Standard
34637 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34638 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34639 called nomenclature or glossary.
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34650 \begin_inset Index idx
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34661 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34663 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34670 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34674 \begin_layout Standard
34675 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34676 and then use the menu
34678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34689 or the toolbar button
34692 arg "nomencl-insert"
34697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34708 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34712 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34713 The first is the term or
34717 that you wish to define.
34722 of the term or symbol.
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34734 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34735 code for nomenclature entries the option
34739 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34747 \begin_layout Subsection
34748 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34749 \begin_inset Index idx
34752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34753 Nomenclature ! Layout
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34762 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34766 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34773 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34781 \begin_inset Newline newline
34789 \begin_inset Newline newline
34795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34802 character starts/ends the formula.
34803 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34804 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34816 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34826 \begin_layout Standard
34827 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34828 syntax is given in section
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34835 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34851 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34853 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34858 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34865 in this document is:
34866 \begin_inset Newline newline
34871 dummy entry for the character
34876 \begin_inset Newline newline
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34898 font use the command
34927 \begin_layout Standard
34928 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34933 \begin_inset space \space{}
34937 \begin_inset Newline newline
34953 \begin_inset Newline newline
34956 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34957 This command will make the font of all symbols
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34972 \begin_layout Standard
34973 If the characters |
34974 \begin_inset space \space{}
34978 \begin_inset space \space{}
34982 \begin_inset space \space{}
34986 \begin_inset space \space{}
34990 \begin_inset space \space{}
34993 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34994 code they need to be escaped
34996 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34998 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
35001 character in front of them.
35002 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
35004 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35005 LatexCommand nomenclature
35006 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
35007 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
35013 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
35015 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35016 LatexCommand nomenclature
35017 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
35018 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
35028 \begin_layout Subsection
35029 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
35030 \begin_inset Index idx
35033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35034 Nomenclature ! Sort order
35042 \begin_layout Standard
35043 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35044 -code of the symbol
35046 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
35048 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
35051 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35052 LatexCommand nomenclature
35054 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
35062 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
35067 LatexCommand nomenclature
35070 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
35076 They will be sorted by
35077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35103 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35106 will be sorted before the
35110 since the character
35111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35118 is considered in sorting.
35121 \begin_layout Standard
35122 To control the sort order, you can edit the
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35130 field of the nomenclature dialog.
35131 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
35133 For the example given, you can insert
35137 in this field for the
35138 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35145 will be located before
35146 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
35158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35168 \begin_layout Subsection
35169 Nomenclature Options
35170 \begin_inset Index idx
35173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35174 Nomenclature ! Options
35180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35182 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
35189 \begin_layout Standard
35194 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
35195 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
35198 \begin_layout Description
35199 refeq Appends the phrase
35200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35215 to every nomenclature entry, where
35221 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
35224 \begin_layout Description
35225 refpage Appends the phrase
35226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35241 to every nomenclature entry, where
35247 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
35250 \begin_layout Description
35251 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
35254 \begin_layout Standard
35255 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
35256 class options list in the
35258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35262 In this document the options
35269 \begin_layout Standard
35270 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
35278 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
35283 field in the nomenclature dialog:
35286 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_layout Description
35299 nomrefpage Like the
35306 \begin_layout Description
35309 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
35318 \begin_layout Description
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35328 \begin_inset space ~
35333 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
35336 \begin_layout Standard
35338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35345 are automatically translated for most document languages.
35346 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
35350 \begin_layout Standard
35359 \begin_inset Newline newline
35365 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35381 unskip, see equation
35384 \begin_inset Newline newline
35391 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35392 \begin_inset Newline newline
35398 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35420 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
35423 \begin_inset space ~
35428 in the document settings under
35431 \begin_inset space ~
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35447 \begin_inset Newline newline
35451 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35467 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35469 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35470 \begin_inset Newline newline
35477 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35478 \begin_inset Newline newline
35482 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35498 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35503 \begin_layout Subsection
35504 Printing the Nomenclature
35505 \begin_inset Index idx
35508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35509 Nomenclature ! Printing
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35518 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35521 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35537 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35538 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35539 You can choose between these settings:
35542 \begin_layout Description
35543 Default a space of 1
35544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35550 \begin_layout Description
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35556 \begin_inset space ~
35559 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35562 \begin_layout Description
35563 Custom custom space
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35567 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35576 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35584 For example, in order to change the name to
35588 , add the following line to the preamble:
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35604 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35608 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35609 \begin_inset Newline newline
35624 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35627 \begin_layout Subsection
35628 Nomenclature Program
35629 \begin_inset Index idx
35632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 Nomenclature ! Program
35639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35641 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35648 \begin_layout Standard
35654 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35655 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35657 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35662 by adding options, see section
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35669 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35674 The available options are listed and explained in
35675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35677 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35685 \begin_layout Section
35687 \begin_inset Index idx
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35697 \begin_inset Index idx
35700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35701 Document ! Branches
35707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35709 name "sec:Branches"
35716 \begin_layout Standard
35717 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35718 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35719 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35720 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35725 allows you to put text into branches.
35726 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35727 To create a branch, either select the menu
35729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35730 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35733 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35742 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35743 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35744 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35745 and whether the name of the branch should
35746 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35747 (see below for an example).
35748 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35749 to the name of the other) and to add
35750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35765 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35766 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35769 \begin_layout Standard
35770 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35771 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35776 where you can choose a branch.
35777 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35783 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35787 \begin_inset Branch Question
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35796 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35804 \begin_layout Standard
35805 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35809 \begin_layout Standard
35814 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35833 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35834 Consider for example a file
35835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35842 which has the above branches.
35844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35851 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35875 branch were inactive,
35876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35891 branch was active, likewise
35892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35907 branch was active, and
35908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35911 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35915 if both branches were active.
35916 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35917 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35923 \begin_layout Standard
35925 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
35926 It is also possible to
35927 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
35931 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
35933 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
35936 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
35941 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
35942 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
35946 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
35948 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
35951 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35952 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35964 \begin_layout Standard
35965 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35969 \begin_layout Standard
35975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35982 branch is deactivated.
35988 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35995 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35996 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35997 definitions for each branch.
35998 For example you can define for the question branch
36002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36004 -syntax, see section
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36011 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36033 \begin_layout Standard
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36044 and for the answer branch
36047 \begin_layout Standard
36057 \begin_layout Standard
36067 \begin_layout Standard
36068 \begin_inset Branch Question
36072 \begin_layout Standard
36076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 \begin_inset Branch Answer
36109 \begin_layout Standard
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36142 Now it is possible to use the
36146 question{\SpecialChar ldots
36153 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
36156 commands to obtain conditional output.
36157 Here is an example formula where only the
36164 \begin_inset Formula
36166 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
36174 \begin_layout Standard
36175 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
36183 \begin_layout Standard
36184 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
36186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36190 \begin_inset space \space{}
36193 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
36195 For this advanced usage, see the
36201 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36204 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
36208 \begin_layout Standard
36210 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
36211 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
36212 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
36217 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
36218 context menu of branch inset.
36223 \begin_layout Section
36225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36227 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
36232 \begin_inset Index idx
36235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36244 \begin_layout Standard
36246 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
36251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36252 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36256 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
36259 allows you to set up
36260 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
36262 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
36266 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
36268 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
36272 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
36276 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
36281 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
36283 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
36287 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
36289 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
36292 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36294 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
36296 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
36304 \begin_inset Index idx
36307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36309 packages ! hyperref
36315 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
36316 which you need to enable by clicking
36318 Use Hyperref Support
36320 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
36321 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
36324 Customize Hyperref Options
36327 Among other things, hyperref
36328 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
36332 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
36334 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
36338 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
36342 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
36345 cross-references in the
36346 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
36350 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
36352 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
36356 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
36357 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
36360 table of contents entry or on a reference to
36361 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
36362 open a website or to
36364 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
36366 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
36367 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
36368 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
36373 \begin_layout Standard
36374 The header information in the dialog tab
36378 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
36379 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
36380 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
36383 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
36384 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
36401 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
36404 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36422 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
36425 \begin_layout Standard
36427 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
36429 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
36437 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
36438 you can customize the
36439 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
36441 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
36445 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
36447 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
36451 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
36452 , and you can specify
36455 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
36457 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
36458 will look and if links for
36460 bibliographical backreferences are created
36461 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
36467 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
36468 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36487 option allows long links to be split;
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36494 \begin_inset space ~
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36511 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36519 colors the different links.
36520 The default colors are:
36523 \begin_layout Labeling
36524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36529 for hyperlinks and URLs
36532 \begin_layout Labeling
36533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36541 \begin_layout Labeling
36542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36550 \begin_layout Standard
36551 but you can change these in the
36552 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
36554 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
36560 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
36562 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
36568 For example, in this document they were changed with the
36569 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
36573 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
36583 \begin_layout Quote
36586 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36591 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
36596 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
36597 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
36598 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
36603 \begin_layout Standard
36608 you can specify if PDF
36609 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
36611 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
36615 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
36616 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
36618 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
36619 readers to navigate through the document.
36620 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
36623 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
36625 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
36629 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
36635 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
36637 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
36639 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
36642 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
36651 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
36652 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
36653 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
36654 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
36655 when opening the PDF.
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36662 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
36663 \begin_inset space ~
36666 1 will only display the sections
36667 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
36668 (collapsing the rest)
36671 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
36675 \begin_layout Standard
36677 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
36682 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
36683 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
36685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36692 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
36693 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
36694 \begin_inset Flex Code
36697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36699 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
36709 , not via the package options.
36710 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
36711 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
36714 \begin_layout Quote
36716 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
36719 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
36720 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
36722 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
36728 \begin_layout Standard
36730 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
36733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36734 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36737 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36744 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
36749 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
36750 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
36752 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
36753 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
36755 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
36758 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
36761 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
36762 and not very well documented (look for a file called
36764 documentmetadata-support.pdf
36766 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
36767 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
36768 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
36771 \begin_layout Standard
36773 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
36774 PDF properties are also used in this document.
36775 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
36781 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
36782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36794 \begin_layout Section
36796 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36800 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36807 \begin_layout Subsection
36810 \begin_inset Index idx
36813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36823 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 As \SpecialChar LyX
36832 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36833 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36834 commands and constructs,
36837 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36838 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36839 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36840 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36841 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36842 cannot support all packages and
36846 \begin_layout Standard
36847 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36848 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36849 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36853 Code box is created by the menu
36855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36862 or by the toolbar button
36875 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36883 \begin_layout Standard
36884 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36886 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36888 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36893 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36898 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36905 , you can write the command part
36911 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36912 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36916 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36917 Code box behind the word.
36918 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36919 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36924 \begin_inset Graphics
36925 filename clipart/ERT.png
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 This is a line with a
36942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36965 \begin_layout Standard
36966 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36975 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36976 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36977 know that the command is finished.
36985 \begin_layout Subsection
36986 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36988 \begin_inset Argument 1
36991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36992 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36999 \begin_inset Index idx
37002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37012 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37019 \begin_layout Standard
37020 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
37021 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37022 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
37023 uses in the background.
37024 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
37025 is based on commands, you can
37026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37034 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
37035 any time if you know the right commands.
37036 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
37037 is the end of the day.
37038 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
37039 all caption labels bold.
37040 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
37042 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
37046 \begin_layout Standard
37047 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
37049 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37051 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37064 \begin_layout Standard
37065 As result you find that the package
37070 \begin_inset Index idx
37073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37081 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
37083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37086 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37103 usepackage[options]{package name}
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
37108 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
37109 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
37110 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
37113 \begin_layout Standard
37114 In your case the package name is
37119 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
37124 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
37125 So you add the command
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37133 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37142 For more commands provided by the
37146 package, have a look at its documentation,
37147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37162 \begin_layout Standard
37163 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
37165 For example if you use a
37169 class, you don't need the package
37173 , you can instead write
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37181 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
37186 \begin_layout Standard
37187 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
37188 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
37189 documentation of the document class you want to use.
37196 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37200 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
37201 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
37203 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37204 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
37205 Code box as described in the previous
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37210 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
37211 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37214 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37216 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37245 \begin_inset Note Note
37248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37249 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
37257 \begin_layout Left Header
37258 \begin_inset Argument 1
37261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37281 \begin_inset Note Note
37284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37285 defines the header line as described below
37293 \begin_layout Center Header
37294 \begin_inset Argument 1
37297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37306 \begin_layout Right Header
37307 \begin_inset Argument 1
37310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 \begin_layout Left Footer
37332 \begin_inset Argument 1
37335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37356 \begin_layout Center Footer
37357 \begin_inset Argument 1
37360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37372 \begin_inset Newline newline
37376 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37382 \begin_layout Right Footer
37383 \begin_inset Argument 1
37386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37408 \begin_layout Section
37409 Customized Page Headers and Footers
37410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37412 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
37417 \begin_inset Index idx
37420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37421 Document ! Header/Footer line
37427 \begin_inset Index idx
37430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37467 As a second step add in the menu
37469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37479 Custom Header/Footerlines
37482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37486 This module offers the following 6
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37493 \begin_layout Description
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37517 \begin_layout Description
37519 \begin_inset space ~
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_layout Standard
37542 for the different positions in the header/footer.
37543 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
37546 \begin_layout Standard
37547 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
37548 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37556 reference "fig:Page-layout"
37560 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
37563 \begin_layout Standard
37564 \begin_inset Float figure
37571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37574 \begin_inset Tabular
37575 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
37576 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
37577 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37579 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
37593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37599 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37628 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37639 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
37642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37643 The normal text on the page goes here.
37644 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
37646 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
37647 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
37652 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37661 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37690 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
37713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37719 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37737 \begin_inset Caption Standard
37739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37742 name "fig:Page-layout"
37746 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
37759 \begin_layout Standard
37760 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37768 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
37772 \begin_inset space ~
37777 is set to “Default”.
37778 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
37793 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
37794 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
37795 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37797 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37799 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37803 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37804 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37810 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_layout Description
37821 thepage prints the current page number
37824 \begin_layout Description
37827 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37830 \begin_layout Description
37833 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37836 \begin_layout Description
37839 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37840 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37847 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37850 because it usually goes in a left header.
37853 \begin_layout Description
37856 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37857 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37859 It is normally used in the right header.
37862 \begin_layout Subsection
37863 Default header/footer
37866 \begin_layout Standard
37867 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37868 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37869 footer has the page number.
37870 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37871 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37872 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37883 \begin_layout Subsection
37887 \begin_layout Standard
37888 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37889 Some pages are different.
37890 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37891 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37892 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37893 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37894 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37898 Header and footer decoration line
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 By default, you get a 0.4
37903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37906 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37907 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37919 in the following way:
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37929 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37932 \begin_layout Standard
37933 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37946 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37954 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37956 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37972 Several header/footer lines
37975 \begin_layout Standard
37976 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37977 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37978 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37980 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37996 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_layout Standard
38013 headheight}{height}
38016 \begin_layout Standard
38021 is a size in standard units (e.
38022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38026 \begin_inset space \space{}
38034 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
38035 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
38036 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38037 logfile with the menu
38039 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38049 \begin_inset space ~
38054 to see if you can find a warning about the package
38059 \begin_inset Index idx
38062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 packages ! fancyhdr
38070 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
38071 for your header/footer.
38074 \begin_layout Subsection
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
38080 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
38081 This example consists of the following definition:
38084 \begin_layout Description
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38095 , empty optional argument
38098 \begin_layout Description
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38103 Header empty, empty optional argument
38106 \begin_layout Description
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38117 in the optional argument
38120 \begin_layout Description
38122 \begin_inset space ~
38131 in the optional argument
38134 \begin_layout Description
38136 \begin_inset space ~
38149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38153 \begin_inset Newline newline
38157 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38164 in the optional argument
38167 \begin_layout Description
38169 \begin_inset space ~
38178 , empty optional argument
38181 \begin_layout Description
38184 headrulewidth set to 2
38185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38192 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
38193 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
38199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38216 \begin_layout Standard
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 pagestyle{headings}
38230 \begin_inset Note Note
38233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38234 switches back to page style with the default headings
38242 \begin_layout Section
38243 Previewing Snippets of your Document
38244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38246 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38251 \begin_inset Index idx
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38261 \begin_inset Index idx
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38275 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
38276 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
38277 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38291 \begin_inset Index idx
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 packages ! preview-latex
38301 (on some systems named simply
38306 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38308 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38315 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38317 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
38325 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
38326 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38327 -package are automatically
38328 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
38332 \begin_layout Subsection
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38337 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38338 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
38340 activate the option
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38350 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38363 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38383 \begin_inset space ~
38388 is the multiplication factor for the size.
38391 \begin_layout Standard
38392 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_layout Standard
38414 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
38415 and when you finish
38419 \begin_layout Standard
38420 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38428 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
38429 generated by activating the option
38432 \begin_inset space ~
38438 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
38446 \begin_layout Subsection
38447 Selected document parts
38450 \begin_layout Standard
38451 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
38452 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
38453 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
38454 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38456 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
38458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38462 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
38463 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
38464 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
38467 \begin_layout Standard
38468 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38475 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 is explained in section
38489 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
38494 \begin_inset space ~
38504 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
38505 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38506 the final rotated boxes,
38507 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
38508 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
38510 Here is the result:
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 \begin_inset Preview
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38525 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
38531 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
38541 height_special "totalheight"
38546 backgroundcolor "none"
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38574 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
38580 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
38587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 \begin_layout Standard
38603 Previewing works also for colors.
38604 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 is explained in section
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38644 \begin_inset Preview
38646 \begin_layout Standard
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
38674 This is text within a colored, framed box.
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38693 \begin_layout Standard
38694 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 If \SpecialChar LyX
38702 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
38703 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
38704 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
38705 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38706 packages in your document preamble that are required by
38707 the \SpecialChar TeX
38709 If \SpecialChar LyX
38710 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
38711 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
38713 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
38714 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
38715 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
38718 \begin_layout Subsection
38723 \begin_layout Standard
38724 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38725 source of the whole document or parts of it.
38728 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38735 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38737 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
38739 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
38740 's main window, then only this selection
38741 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
38742 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
38743 the source view window.
38748 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38749 ; but note that if you have
38750 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38752 not just the one which is open at the time.
38755 \begin_layout Section
38756 Advanced Find and Replace
38757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38759 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38764 \begin_inset Index idx
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38774 \begin_inset Index idx
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38786 \begin_layout Subsection
38790 \begin_layout Standard
38791 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38792 allows for searching of complex,
38793 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38795 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38796 The key-features are:
38799 \begin_layout Itemize
38800 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38801 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38802 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38806 \begin_layout Itemize
38807 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38808 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38809 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38810 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38813 \begin_layout Itemize
38814 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38815 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38816 outside of mathematics environments
38819 \begin_layout Itemize
38820 Search may be widened to a specific
38825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38829 \begin_inset space ~
38832 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38833 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38840 \begin_layout Itemize
38841 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38842 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38847 \begin_inset space ~
38850 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38853 \begin_layout Subsection
38857 \begin_layout Standard
38858 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38860 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38873 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38876 ) or the toolbar button
38879 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38885 Advanced Find and Replace
38890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38894 \begin_layout Standard
38900 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38909 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38912 arg "paragraph-break"
38916 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38917 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38921 arg "paragraph-break"
38924 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38928 searches backwards.
38931 \begin_layout Standard
38935 \begin_inset space ~
38940 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38954 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38958 Searching for mathematics
38961 \begin_layout Standard
38962 Mathematical formulas, such as
38963 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38966 or something more complex like
38967 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38970 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38975 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38976 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38977 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38978 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38988 \begin_layout Standard
38989 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38990 This is done by switching to the
38994 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38999 This way, entering in the
39006 \begin_layout Itemize
39007 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
39008 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
39011 \begin_layout Itemize
39012 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
39013 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
39016 \begin_layout Itemize
39017 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
39018 of it only within section headings.
39019 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
39020 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
39024 \begin_layout Itemize
39025 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
39026 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
39029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39033 \begin_layout Standard
39034 The entries made in the
39038 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
39041 \begin_inset space ~
39047 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
39051 button or alternatively press
39054 arg "paragraph-break"
39061 while the cursor is in the
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_layout Standard
39073 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
39075 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
39079 \begin_layout Itemize
39080 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
39081 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
39082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39089 with its typewriter version
39090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39104 \begin_layout Itemize
39105 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
39107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39111 \begin_inset Formula $R$
39115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39123 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
39127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39130 (you may want to enable the
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39146 options and disable the
39154 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
39155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39162 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
39163 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
39167 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
39170 , or occurrences of
39171 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
39175 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
39181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39185 \begin_layout Standard
39186 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
39193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39195 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
39205 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
39211 This is done with the context menu
39213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39214 Insert Regular Expression
39216 while the cursor is in the
39221 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
39222 expression matching rules
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
39230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39237 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
39238 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
39244 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
39245 same text in the document.
39246 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
39247 Examples of using such a feature may be:
39250 \begin_layout Enumerate
39251 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
39256 editor the fraction
39257 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
39261 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39264 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
39265 fractions with the given denominator.
39268 \begin_layout Enumerate
39269 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
39270 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
39274 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
39277 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
39278 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
39284 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
39285 and the 'Select all'
39294 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39299 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
39300 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
39301 Also, by inserting a
39302 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
39305 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
39306 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
39308 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
39309 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
39313 \begin_layout Description
39315 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
39316 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
39319 \begin_layout Description
39321 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39326 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
39329 \begin_layout Description
39331 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39336 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
39339 \begin_layout Description
39341 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
39343 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_layout Description
39352 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39358 upright, italic, ...
39361 \begin_layout Description
39363 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
39365 \begin_inset space ~
39372 \begin_layout Description
39374 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
39375 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
39378 \begin_layout Description
39380 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
39382 Single, Double, Wawy
39385 \begin_layout Description
39387 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
39388 Strike-through Single, With '/'
39391 \begin_layout Description
39393 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
39394 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
39397 \begin_layout Description
39399 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39405 title, part, chapter, section, ...
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
39412 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
39413 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39416 , and referring back to them through
39417 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39421 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
39425 For example, try searching with the regexp
39426 \begin_inset Newline newline
39430 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
39442 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
39443 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
39448 \begin_inset Newline newline
39451 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
39454 \begin_layout Standard
39455 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
39456 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
39472 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
39473 sub-expressions is absolute.
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39482 always refers to the first occurrence of
39483 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39486 in all entered regexps.
39494 \begin_layout Section
39496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39498 name "sec:Spellchecking"
39503 \begin_inset Index idx
39506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39517 has a built-in spell checker.
39520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39527 key or the toolbar button
39530 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39533 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
39534 beginning of the currently selected text.
39535 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
39536 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
39537 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
39538 scrolled so that it is visible.
39539 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
39540 n, if any could be found.
39541 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
39545 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
39546 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39550 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
39553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39557 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
39558 a different one at the top of the dialog.
39560 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
39561 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
39564 \begin_inset space ~
39572 arg "dialog-show character"
39575 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
39577 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
39580 \begin_layout Standard
39581 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
39582 can be downloaded from here:
39583 \begin_inset Newline newline
39587 \begin_inset Flex URL
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
39594 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
39595 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
39596 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
39604 \begin_inset Newline newline
39608 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
39610 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
39611 You should download
39614 \begin_inset space ~
39617 files for each language
39618 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
39623 link at the end of the opened webpage)
39626 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
39627 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39634 files into \SpecialChar LyX
39635 's installation subfolder
39643 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39645 \begin_inset Newline newline
39648 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
39649 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
39650 but in most cases these are
39666 is the language code.
39669 \begin_layout Subsection
39673 \begin_layout Standard
39676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39677 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39685 you can set the following things:
39688 \begin_layout Description
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39693 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
39694 should use for spell checking.
39695 Depending on your platform,
39705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39706 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
39707 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39725 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
39728 \begin_layout Description
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39733 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
39734 will always use the given language
39735 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
39738 \begin_layout Description
39740 \begin_inset space ~
39743 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
39745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39749 \begin_inset space \space{}
39753 This should normally not be needed.
39756 \begin_layout Description
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39762 \begin_inset space ~
39765 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
39767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39777 \begin_layout Description
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39782 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39783 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39784 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
39785 appear in a context menu.
39786 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
39790 \begin_layout Description
39792 \begin_inset space ~
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39803 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
39807 \begin_layout Section
39809 \begin_inset Index idx
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39821 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39830 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39831 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39843 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39853 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39855 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
39856 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39857 which are available for many languages.
39860 \begin_layout Standard
39861 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
39862 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39866 \begin_layout Subsection
39867 Setting up the thesaurus
39870 \begin_layout Standard
39879 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39883 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39888 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39902 For instance, the US English files are named:
39905 \begin_layout Itemize
39909 \begin_layout Itemize
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39922 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39923 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39926 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39927 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39928 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39935 ) to the path where they are installed.
39939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39940 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39941 ies, typical locations are
39947 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39951 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39955 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39958 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39964 LibreOffice-<Version>
39971 On the Mac, the default location is
39973 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39974 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39975 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39976 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39977 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39978 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39986 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39987 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39988 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39992 \begin_layout Standard
39993 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39995 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39997 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
40000 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
40001 \begin_inset Newline newline
40005 \begin_inset Flex URL
40008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40010 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
40012 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
40013 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
40014 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
40024 \begin_layout Standard
40025 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
40026 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
40028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40029 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40030 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40037 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
40039 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
40040 and point \SpecialChar LyX
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
40047 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
40050 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
40056 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
40059 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
40060 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
40062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40068 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40069 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40070 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40077 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
40080 \begin_layout Subsection
40081 Using the thesaurus
40084 \begin_layout Standard
40085 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
40087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40090 or the toolbar button
40093 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40096 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
40098 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
40100 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
40101 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
40102 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
40111 ), related terms (such as
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40123 ), compounds (such as
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40135 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
40144 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
40147 \begin_layout Standard
40148 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
40149 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
40153 \begin_layout Standard
40154 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
40155 the dictionary, such as the above
40159 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
40160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40164 \begin_inset space \space{}
40167 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
40168 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
40169 For example, looking up the word form
40173 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
40178 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
40179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40183 \begin_inset space \space{}
40194 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
40195 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
40196 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
40199 \begin_layout Section
40201 \begin_inset Index idx
40204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40211 \begin_inset Index idx
40214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40215 Document ! Change Tracking
40221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40223 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
40230 \begin_layout Standard
40231 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
40232 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
40233 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
40234 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
40236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40241 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_layout Standard
40252 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
40266 The color depends on the author that made the change.
40267 You can change the color in
40269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40270 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40281 \SpecialChar menuseparator
40287 \begin_inset Index idx
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40291 Color ! Change tracking
40296 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
40297 's status bar when the
40298 cursor is in changed text.
40299 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
40302 arg "changes-merge"
40308 \begin_layout Standard
40309 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
40311 \begin_inset Index idx
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40324 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40330 \begin_layout Standard
40331 \begin_inset Graphics
40332 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
40340 \begin_layout Standard
40341 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40347 \begin_layout Standard
40348 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40358 \begin_layout Standard
40359 \begin_inset Tabular
40360 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
40361 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40362 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40363 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40373 arg "changes-track"
40381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40392 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 arg "changes-output"
40420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40431 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40471 Jumps to the next change
40477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40486 arg "change-accept"
40494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40505 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40525 arg "change-reject"
40533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40544 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40546 \begin_inset space ~
40555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40564 arg "changes-merge"
40572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40583 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40603 arg "all-changes-accept"
40611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40622 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40624 \begin_inset space ~
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40646 arg "all-changes-reject"
40654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40665 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40704 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40738 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_layout Standard
40757 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40763 \begin_layout Standard
40764 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
40784 \begin_layout Standard
40785 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
40786 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40787 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
40788 the next change after the current cursor position.
40789 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40790 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
40791 step to the next change.
40792 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40795 \begin_layout Standard
40796 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
40797 to describe a change.
40800 \begin_layout Standard
40802 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
40803 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40809 \begin_inset Index idx
40812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40829 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40835 \begin_layout Section
40836 Comparison of Documents
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40839 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40844 \begin_inset Index idx
40847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40848 Comparison of documents
40856 \begin_layout Standard
40857 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40860 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40864 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40865 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40867 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40869 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_inset space ~
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40915 enables the change tracking option
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40931 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40934 \begin_layout Section
40935 International Support
40936 \begin_inset Index idx
40939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40940 International support
40948 \begin_layout Standard
40949 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40950 with any language you want.
40951 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40952 up \SpecialChar LyX
40954 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40956 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40965 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40966 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40973 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40980 \begin_layout Subsection
40982 \begin_inset Index idx
40985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40992 \begin_inset Index idx
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40996 Document ! Settings
41002 \begin_inset Index idx
41005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41006 Document ! Language
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41021 dialog lets you set
41023 the language, the quote style and character encoding
41028 \begin_layout Standard
41033 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41043 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
41044 For details about the different encoding options see section
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41051 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
41058 \begin_layout Subsection
41059 Keyboard mapping configuration
41060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41062 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 If you have for example a U.
41071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41074 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
41075 can use an alternate keymap.
41076 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
41081 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41082 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41083 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
41086 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41093 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
41098 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
41099 which one you want to use.
41102 \begin_layout Standard
41103 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
41104 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
41105 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
41106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41109 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
41110 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
41111 one to support the characters you want.
41112 This and many other customizations are explained in the
41119 \begin_layout Chapter
41122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41124 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41132 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
41133 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
41134 topic inside the user's guide.
41137 \begin_layout Section
41139 \begin_inset Index idx
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 \begin_layout Standard
41156 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
41159 \begin_layout Subsection
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41164 Creates a new document.
41167 \begin_layout Subsection
41171 \begin_layout Standard
41172 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
41173 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
41174 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
41176 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
41177 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
41183 \begin_layout Subsection
41187 \begin_layout Standard
41191 \begin_layout Subsection
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41196 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
41197 Click there on a file to open it.
41200 \begin_layout Subsection
41202 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
41206 \begin_layout Standard
41208 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
41209 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
41213 \begin_layout Subsection
41217 \begin_layout Standard
41218 Closes the current document.
41221 \begin_layout Subsection
41225 \begin_layout Standard
41226 Closes all opened documents.
41229 \begin_layout Subsection
41233 \begin_layout Standard
41234 Saves the actual document.
41237 \begin_layout Subsection
41241 \begin_layout Standard
41242 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
41243 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
41247 \begin_layout Subsection
41249 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
41253 \begin_layout Standard
41255 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
41256 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
41262 \begin_layout Subsection
41266 \begin_layout Standard
41267 Saves all opened documents.
41270 \begin_layout Subsection
41274 \begin_layout Standard
41275 Reloads the actual document from disk.
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41282 \begin_layout Standard
41283 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
41284 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
41285 It is described in the section
41287 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
41292 Additional Features
41297 \begin_layout Subsection
41301 \begin_layout Standard
41302 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
41303 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
41305 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
41306 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
41310 \begin_layout Standard
41311 When using the menu entry
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41319 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41336 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
41337 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
41340 \begin_layout Subsection
41342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41344 name "subsec:Export"
41351 \begin_layout Standard
41352 You can export your document to various file formats.
41353 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
41355 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
41356 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
41357 during its configuration.
41360 \begin_layout Standard
41361 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41369 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41376 \begin_layout Description
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41385 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41390 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
41391 \begin_inset Newline newline
41394 Since \SpecialChar LyX
41395 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
41399 \begin_layout Description
41400 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
41406 \begin_layout Description
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41411 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
41417 \begin_layout Description
41418 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
41419 's native DVI-format.
41420 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
41421 files paths or file names in your document.
41423 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
41430 \begin_layout Description
41431 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
41432 in files paths or file names
41435 \begin_layout Description
41437 \begin_inset space ~
41444 ) DVI-format using the program
41446 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41449 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
41453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41461 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
41469 \begin_layout Description
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41474 (cropped) the same as
41478 but with cropped page margins.
41481 \begin_layout Description
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41486 Dot text file with code in the programming language
41490 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
41495 \begin_layout Description
41499 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41507 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
41515 \begin_layout Description
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41524 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
41528 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
41536 \begin_layout Description
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41549 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41550 source that is compilable with the program
41552 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41556 \begin_layout Description
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41565 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41566 source, additionally all images used in the document
41567 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
41571 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
41574 \begin_layout Description
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41583 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41584 source code, additionally all images used in the document
41585 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
41593 \begin_layout Description
41597 \begin_inset space ~
41606 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41607 source that is compilable with the program
41613 \begin_layout Description
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41626 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41627 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
41633 \begin_layout Description
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41638 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41639 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41645 \begin_inset space \space{}
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41669 represent the version number)
41672 \begin_layout Description
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41681 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
41682 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
41683 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41687 \begin_layout Description
41688 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41689 's internal XHTML engine
41692 \begin_layout Description
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41702 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41709 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
41714 For the conversion the program
41723 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41726 \begin_layout Description
41727 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41732 \begin_layout Description
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41737 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
41739 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
41742 For the conversion the program
41751 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41754 \begin_layout Description
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41759 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41760 For the conversion the program
41769 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41772 \begin_layout Description
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41777 (cropped) the same as
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41785 but with cropped page margins
41788 \begin_layout Description
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41797 PDF-format using the program
41801 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41804 \begin_layout Description
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41820 \begin_inset space ~
41825 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41830 \begin_inset space \space{}
41833 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41837 \begin_layout Description
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41846 PDF-format using the program
41848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41851 , produces PDF-files directly
41854 \begin_layout Description
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41863 PDF-format using the program
41867 , produces PDF-files directly
41870 \begin_layout Description
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41879 PDF-format using the program
41883 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41886 \begin_layout Description
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41895 PDF-format using the program
41900 , produces PDF-files directly
41903 \begin_layout Description
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_layout Description
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41928 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41929 and then exported as text using the program
41934 \begin_layout Description
41939 PostScript format using the program
41947 options see section
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41954 reference "subsec:General-output"
41961 \begin_layout Description
41962 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41963 source and also code in the statistical programming
41977 it is possible to use
41981 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41986 If one of the menu entries
41993 \begin_inset space ~
42002 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42004 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42012 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42017 \begin_inset Index idx
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42030 \begin_layout Subsection
42034 \begin_layout Standard
42035 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
42036 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42045 reference "sec:Paths"
42050 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
42059 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
42060 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
42061 's preferences as described in section
42062 \begin_inset space ~
42066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42068 reference "subsec:Converters"
42075 \begin_layout Subsection
42076 New and Close Window
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42080 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42084 \begin_layout Subsection
42088 \begin_layout Standard
42089 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
42092 \begin_layout Section
42094 \begin_inset Index idx
42097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 \begin_layout Subsection
42110 \begin_layout Standard
42111 Described in section
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42118 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
42125 \begin_layout Subsection
42126 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
42129 \begin_layout Standard
42130 Described in section
42131 \begin_inset space ~
42135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42137 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
42144 \begin_layout Subsection
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42149 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
42150 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
42153 \begin_layout Subsection
42157 \begin_layout Standard
42158 Selects the whole document.
42161 \begin_layout Subsection
42162 Find & Replace (Quick)
42165 \begin_layout Standard
42166 Described in section
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42173 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
42180 \begin_layout Subsection
42181 Find & Replace (Advanced)
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42185 Described in section
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42192 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
42199 \begin_layout Subsection
42200 Move Paragraph Up/Down
42203 \begin_layout Standard
42204 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
42208 \begin_layout Subsection
42210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
42214 \begin_layout Standard
42216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
42217 Described in section
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42224 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
42233 \begin_layout Subsection
42235 \begin_inset Index idx
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42239 Paragraph ! Settings
42247 \begin_layout Standard
42248 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
42249 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
42253 \begin_layout Standard
42254 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
42255 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
42261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42262 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
42274 \begin_layout Subsection
42276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42282 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
42283 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
42288 \begin_layout Enumerate
42290 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
42291 Customize text properties by means of the
42297 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
42300 ; this is described in section
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
42314 \begin_layout Enumerate
42316 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
42317 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
42319 Apply last settings
42322 \begin_layout Enumerate
42324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
42325 Change the casing of selected text (
42340 \begin_layout Subsection
42342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42348 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
42349 This sub-menu only appears
42350 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
42352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
42353 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
42376 \begin_inset space ~
42380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42382 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
42391 \begin_layout Subsection
42392 Table and Rows & Columns
42395 \begin_layout Standard
42396 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
42397 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
42398 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
42401 \begin_layout Subsection
42405 \begin_layout Standard
42406 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
42407 It will dissolve this inset.
42408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
42412 \begin_layout Subsection
42416 \begin_layout Standard
42417 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
42418 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
42421 \begin_layout Subsection
42422 Increase/Decrease List Depth
42425 \begin_layout Standard
42426 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
42428 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
42429 \begin_inset space ~
42433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42435 reference "sec:Nesting"
42440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42442 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42449 \begin_layout Section
42451 \begin_inset Index idx
42454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42463 \begin_layout Standard
42464 At the bottom of the
42468 menu the opened documents are listed.
42471 \begin_layout Subsection
42472 Open/Close all Insets
42475 \begin_layout Standard
42476 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
42479 \begin_layout Subsection
42480 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
42483 \begin_layout Standard
42484 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42488 Math macros are described in the
42495 \begin_layout Subsection
42499 \begin_layout Standard
42500 Shows the outline window as described in sections
42501 \begin_inset space ~
42505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42507 reference "sec:Navigating"
42512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42514 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
42521 \begin_layout Subsection
42525 \begin_layout Standard
42526 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42534 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42541 \begin_layout Subsection
42545 \begin_layout Standard
42546 Opens a window showing console messages.
42547 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
42549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42552 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
42553 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
42554 is processing the document.
42557 \begin_layout Subsection
42559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42561 name "subsec:Toolbars"
42566 \begin_inset Index idx
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42578 \begin_layout Standard
42579 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
42581 All toolbars and the
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42602 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42604 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
42606 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
42610 \begin_layout Standard
42612 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42634 \begin_inset space ~
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42651 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42654 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
42658 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
42660 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
42674 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
42675 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42689 state the toolbar is permanently shown
42690 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
42695 state it is never shown
42701 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
42702 or when a certain feature is enabled.
42703 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
42704 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
42705 is inside a formula or table respectively
42706 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
42707 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42714 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42715 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42721 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42728 \begin_layout Subsection
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42736 \begin_inset space ~
42740 \begin_inset space ~
42744 \begin_inset space ~
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42761 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42762 's main window vertically while
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42769 \begin_inset space ~
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42777 \begin_inset space ~
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42790 will split it horizontally.
42791 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
42792 to view the same document, but at different positions.
42793 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
42794 three or more documents at the same time.
42795 To close a split view, use the menu
42798 \begin_inset space ~
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42810 \begin_layout Subsection
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 Closes a split view.
42818 \begin_layout Subsection
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
42824 so that you will see nothing but your text.
42825 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42826 's main window fullscreen.
42827 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
42828 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42831 \begin_layout Section
42833 \begin_inset Index idx
42836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42845 \begin_layout Subsection
42849 \begin_layout Standard
42850 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42857 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42868 \begin_layout Subsection
42870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42872 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42880 Here you can insert the following characters:
42883 \begin_layout Description
42888 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42891 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42892 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42893 -packages you have installed.
42894 You can get a complete display by checking
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42903 \begin_inset Newline newline
42907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42915 Not all characters will be visible in the
42919 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42920 dialog (see section
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42927 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42931 ) can display every character.
42939 \begin_layout Description
42940 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42944 \begin_layout Description
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42953 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42960 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42967 \begin_layout Description
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42972 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42976 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42982 \begin_layout Description
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42987 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42991 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42997 \begin_layout Description
42999 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
43001 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43008 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
43009 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
43011 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
43014 line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
43018 \begin_layout Description
43020 \begin_inset space ~
43023 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
43027 \begin_layout Description
43029 \begin_inset space ~
43033 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
43034 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
43040 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43045 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
43047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43051 \begin_inset space \space{}
43054 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
43055 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
43061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43064 To insert a fraction use the command
43069 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43073 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
43079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43082 The visible space is hereby the character before the
43089 \begin_layout Description
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43094 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
43098 \begin_layout Description
43100 \begin_inset space ~
43104 \begin_inset Index idx
43107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43114 \begin_inset Index idx
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43118 Language ! Phonetic symbols
43123 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
43124 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
43126 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43132 \begin_inset Index idx
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43143 \begin_inset Newline newline
43146 More information about this feature can be found in the
43152 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43158 \begin_layout Description
43159 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
43161 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
43162 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
43166 \begin_layout Subsection
43170 \begin_layout Standard
43171 Opens a submenu with the following options:
43174 \begin_layout Description
43175 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
43176 \begin_inset script superscript
43178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43187 \begin_layout Description
43188 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
43189 \begin_inset script subscript
43191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 \begin_layout Description
43202 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
43204 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43212 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
43214 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
43217 space as described in section
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43224 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
43231 \begin_layout Description
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43236 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43241 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
43243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43245 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
43250 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
43252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43254 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
43263 \begin_layout Description
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43268 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43275 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
43282 \begin_layout Description
43284 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43289 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
43291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43295 \begin_inset space \space{}
43298 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
43299 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
43305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43308 To insert a fraction use the command
43313 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
43317 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
43323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43326 The visible space is hereby the character before the
43335 \begin_layout Description
43337 \begin_inset space ~
43340 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43347 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
43354 \begin_layout Description
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43359 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43366 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
43373 \begin_layout Description
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43378 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
43379 \begin_inset space ~
43383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43385 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
43392 \begin_layout Description
43393 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
43394 \begin_inset space ~
43398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43400 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
43407 \begin_layout Description
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43412 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43419 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
43426 \begin_layout Description
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43431 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43438 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
43445 \begin_layout Description
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43454 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43463 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
43470 for a usage example.
43473 \begin_layout Description
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43482 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43489 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43496 \begin_layout Description
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43501 Break Inserts a forced line break that
43502 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
43505 justifies the remaining text as described in section
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43512 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43519 \begin_layout Description
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43524 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
43525 \begin_inset space ~
43529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43531 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43538 \begin_layout Description
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43543 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
43544 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43552 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43557 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
43561 \begin_layout Description
43563 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43572 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
43573 to prevent a page break at the given position.
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43589 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
43598 \begin_layout Description
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43603 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43610 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43617 \begin_layout Description
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43626 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43633 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43640 \begin_layout Subsection
43642 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43648 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43649 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
43650 The submenu allows you to insert
43653 \begin_layout Description
43655 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43657 \begin_inset space ~
43660 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
43663 \begin_layout Description
43665 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43674 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
43678 \begin_layout Description
43680 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43682 \begin_inset space ~
43685 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
43688 \begin_layout Description
43690 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43695 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
43698 \begin_layout Description
43700 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43702 \begin_inset space ~
43706 \begin_inset space ~
43709 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
43713 \begin_layout Description
43715 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43720 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
43723 \begin_layout Description
43725 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43735 \begin_inset space ~
43738 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
43741 \begin_layout Description
43743 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset space ~
43752 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
43754 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
43757 \begin_layout Description
43759 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43761 \begin_inset space ~
43764 Name inserts the user name as specified in
43766 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43767 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43773 \begin_layout Description
43775 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43780 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
43782 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43783 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43789 \begin_layout Description
43791 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43792 Other\SpecialChar ldots
43793 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
43794 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
43797 \begin_layout Subsection
43800 List/Contents/References
43803 \begin_layout Standard
43804 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43829 are described in section
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43836 reference "sec:toc"
43845 is described in section
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43852 reference "sec:Index"
43860 is described in section
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43867 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43873 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43876 is described in section
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43883 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43890 \begin_layout Subsection
43894 \begin_layout Standard
43895 To insert floats, as described in section
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43902 reference "sec:Floats"
43906 and in detail the chapter
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_layout Subsection
43925 \begin_layout Standard
43926 To insert notes, described in section
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43933 reference "sec:Notes"
43940 \begin_layout Subsection
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
43947 Branches are described in section
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43954 reference "sec:Branches"
43961 \begin_layout Subsection
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43967 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
43969 An example is the document class
43970 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
43972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43980 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
43984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43989 with three custom insets.
43992 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43996 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
44002 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
44005 \begin_layout Subsection
44007 \begin_inset Index idx
44010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 \begin_layout Standard
44020 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
44022 For more information see chapter
44024 External Document Parts
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44033 \begin_layout Subsection
44035 \begin_inset Index idx
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44047 \begin_layout Standard
44048 Inserts a box in a certain style.
44049 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_layout Subsection
44068 \begin_layout Standard
44073 dialog as described in section
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44080 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44087 \begin_layout Subsection
44091 \begin_layout Standard
44096 as described in section
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44103 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44110 \begin_layout Subsection
44114 \begin_layout Standard
44119 as described in section
44120 \begin_inset space ~
44124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44126 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44133 \begin_layout Subsection
44135 \begin_inset Index idx
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 \begin_inset Index idx
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
44157 \begin_layout Standard
44158 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
44159 Floats are described in section
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44166 reference "sec:Floats"
44170 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
44173 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44189 \begin_layout Subsection
44193 \begin_layout Standard
44194 Inserts an index entry as described in section
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44201 reference "sec:Index"
44208 \begin_layout Subsection
44212 \begin_layout Standard
44213 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44220 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
44227 \begin_layout Subsection
44231 \begin_layout Standard
44232 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
44233 Tables are described in section
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44240 reference "sec:Tables"
44244 and in detail in the chapter
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44259 \begin_layout Subsection
44263 \begin_layout Standard
44269 Graphics are described in section
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44276 reference "sec:Graphics"
44283 \begin_layout Subsection
44287 \begin_layout Standard
44288 Inserts a URL as described in section
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44295 reference "subsec:URLs"
44302 \begin_layout Subsection
44306 \begin_layout Standard
44307 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44314 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
44321 \begin_layout Subsection
44325 \begin_layout Standard
44326 Inserts a footnote as described in section
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44333 reference "sec:Footnotes"
44340 \begin_layout Subsection
44344 \begin_layout Standard
44345 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44352 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
44359 \begin_layout Subsection
44362 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
44365 \begin_layout Standard
44366 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
44367 environments of the same type.
44369 \begin_inset space ~
44373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44375 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
44379 for an explanation.
44382 \begin_layout Subsection
44386 \begin_layout Standard
44387 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
44388 title or caption of a float.
44389 Inserts a short title as described in section
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44396 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
44403 \begin_layout Subsection
44408 \begin_layout Standard
44409 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
44410 Code box as described in section
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44417 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
44424 \begin_layout Subsection
44426 \begin_inset Index idx
44429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 Inserts a program listings box.
44440 Program listings are explained in the chapter
44442 Program Code Listings
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_layout Subsection
44457 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44461 \begin_layout Standard
44463 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44464 Inserts the actual date.
44465 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
44472 \begin_layout Subsection
44476 \begin_layout Standard
44477 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44484 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44491 \begin_layout Section
44493 \begin_inset Index idx
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 \begin_layout Standard
44506 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44510 of the current document.
44511 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
44514 \begin_layout Subsection
44518 \begin_layout Standard
44519 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
44520 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
44521 to jump, for example, between section
44522 \begin_inset space ~
44526 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44530 2.5 and use the submenu
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset space ~
44544 \begin_inset space ~
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44560 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
44564 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
44570 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
44573 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
44576 \begin_layout Standard
44578 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
44579 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44590 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
44593 \begin_inset space ~
44598 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
44601 \begin_layout Subsection
44602 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44606 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
44610 \begin_layout Subsection
44614 \begin_layout Standard
44615 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
44616 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
44617 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
44621 \begin_inset space ~
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44633 \begin_layout Subsection
44637 \begin_layout Standard
44638 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
44641 The \SpecialChar LyX
44642 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44652 \begin_inset space ~
44657 manual for a detailed description.
44660 \begin_layout Section
44662 \begin_inset Index idx
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44674 \begin_layout Subsection
44678 \begin_layout Standard
44679 Change Tracking is described in section
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44686 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44693 \begin_layout Subsection
44701 \begin_layout Standard
44702 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
44703 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
44704 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44706 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
44707 to the clipboard or update the view.
44708 \begin_inset Newline newline
44711 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44715 \begin_layout Standard
44718 Open Containing Directory
44720 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44721 's temporary folder for the document.
44722 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44723 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
44724 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44725 For example some journals require to send the
44729 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44733 \begin_layout Subsection
44734 Start Appendix Here
44737 \begin_layout Standard
44738 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
44739 as described in section
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44746 reference "sec:Appendices"
44753 \begin_layout Subsection
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44761 \begin_layout Standard
44762 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
44763 default output format for the document (menu
44765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44766 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44767 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44769 \begin_inset space ~
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44779 \begin_inset space ~
44783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44785 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44789 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44793 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44798 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44803 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44805 \begin_inset space ~
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44815 \begin_inset space ~
44819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44821 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44825 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44826 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44828 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44829 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44831 \begin_inset space ~
44834 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44839 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44843 \begin_inset space ~
44847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44849 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44854 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44855 when it is first configured.
44856 The default output format is
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44867 \begin_layout Subsection
44868 View (Other Formats)
44871 \begin_layout Standard
44872 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44873 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
44874 actual document with an external program.
44875 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
44876 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44877 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44879 All possible formats are listed in section
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44886 reference "subsec:Export"
44891 You should at least see the menu entry
44896 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44898 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44906 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44911 \begin_inset Index idx
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44924 \begin_layout Standard
44925 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44926 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44928 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44929 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44934 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44939 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44949 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44954 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44955 when it is first configured.
44958 \begin_layout Subsection
44960 \begin_inset space ~
44966 \begin_layout Standard
44967 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
44968 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44971 \begin_layout Subsection
44972 Update (Other Formats)
44975 \begin_layout Standard
44976 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
44977 your document without opening a new viewer window.
44980 \begin_layout Subsection
44981 View Master Document
44984 \begin_layout Standard
44985 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45006 manual for more information on this topic).
45007 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
45008 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
45012 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45021 generates the output of the whole book, while
45025 will just output the chapter alone.
45028 \begin_layout Standard
45029 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
45030 in the document settings (menu
45032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45033 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45034 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45052 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
45056 ) or in the preferences (menu
45058 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45059 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45064 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45069 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45087 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45094 \begin_layout Subsection
45095 Update Master Document
45098 \begin_layout Standard
45099 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
45101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45120 manual for more information on this topic).
45121 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
45122 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
45125 \begin_layout Standard
45126 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
45127 in the document settings (menu
45129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45130 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45131 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45149 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
45153 ) or in the preferences (menu
45155 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45156 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45161 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45184 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45191 \begin_layout Subsection
45193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45195 name "subsec:Compressed"
45202 \begin_layout Standard
45203 Un/compresses the current document.
45204 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
45205 compression (see the
45207 Additional Features
45209 manual for details).
45212 \begin_layout Subsection
45216 \begin_layout Standard
45217 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
45220 \begin_layout Subsection
45224 \begin_layout Standard
45225 The document settings are described in appendix
45226 \begin_inset space ~
45230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45232 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45239 \begin_layout Section
45241 \begin_inset Index idx
45244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45253 \begin_layout Subsection
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45258 Spell checking is explained in section
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45265 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45272 \begin_layout Subsection
45276 \begin_layout Standard
45277 The thesaurus is described in section
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45284 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
45291 \begin_layout Subsection
45293 \begin_inset Index idx
45296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45303 \begin_inset Index idx
45306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45315 \begin_layout Standard
45316 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
45317 the highlighted document part.
45320 \begin_layout Subsection
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45330 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
45339 \begin_layout Standard
45340 Generates with the help of the program
45342 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
45345 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
45346 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
45347 This feature is not available on Windows.
45350 \begin_layout Subsection
45356 \begin_inset Index idx
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45369 \begin_layout Standard
45370 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45380 to see the full filename paths.
45383 \begin_layout Subsection
45385 \begin_inset Index idx
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45397 \begin_layout Standard
45398 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
45399 files as described in section
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45406 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
45413 \begin_layout Subsection
45415 \begin_inset Index idx
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45431 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45449 \begin_inset Index idx
45452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45453 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45462 \begin_layout Standard
45463 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
45464 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
45465 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45466 -packages and programs it needs; see
45468 \begin_inset space ~
45472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45474 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45481 \begin_layout Subsection
45485 \begin_layout Standard
45490 dialog as described in detail in appendix
45491 \begin_inset space ~
45495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45497 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45504 \begin_layout Section
45506 \begin_inset Index idx
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 \begin_layout Standard
45519 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
45520 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
45522 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
45526 \begin_layout Standard
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45535 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
45536 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45537 packages and classes found
45538 by \SpecialChar LyX
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45546 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
45553 \begin_layout Standard
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45562 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
45567 \begin_layout Section
45569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45571 name "sec:Toolbars"
45578 \begin_layout Standard
45579 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45586 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
45593 \begin_layout Standard
45594 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
45595 This is described in the
45597 Additional Features
45602 \begin_layout Subsection
45604 \begin_inset Index idx
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 \begin_layout Standard
45617 \begin_inset Graphics
45618 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45627 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45633 \begin_layout Standard
45634 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45651 \begin_inset Note Note
45654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45660 manual for more information.
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45669 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45675 \begin_layout Standard
45676 \begin_inset Tabular
45677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45678 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 \begin_inset Graphics
45687 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 pull-down box for the environments
45714 \begin_layout Standard
45715 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45723 \begin_inset Tabular
45724 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
45725 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45726 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45727 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45751 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45781 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45811 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45827 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45857 arg "spelling-continuously"
45865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 Spellcheck continuously
45875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45898 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46020 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
46025 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
46051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
46091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
46133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46139 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46140 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
46147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 Emphasize text, function of the
46169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
46172 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46174 \begin_inset space ~
46177 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
46185 arg "dialog-show character"
46196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 Set text to noun style, function of the
46218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
46221 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46226 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46228 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
46234 arg "dialog-show character"
46245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46251 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
46254 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
46262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46267 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
46270 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46283 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
46288 arg "textstyle-apply"
46298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
46304 Format text using the current settings in the
46306 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46308 \begin_inset space ~
46311 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46346 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46348 \begin_inset space ~
46357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46366 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
46374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 arg "tabular-insert"
46402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
46424 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
46432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46437 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
46440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46468 Toggle outline window on/off,
46470 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
46494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46498 Toggle math toolbar on/off
46504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46513 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
46521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46525 Toggle table toolbar on/off
46538 \begin_layout Subsection
46540 \begin_inset Index idx
46543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 \begin_layout Standard
46553 \begin_inset Graphics
46554 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
46562 \begin_layout Standard
46563 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46569 \begin_layout Standard
46570 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46574 \begin_layout Standard
46575 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46582 \begin_inset Tabular
46583 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
46584 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46585 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46586 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
46631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46650 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
46658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46677 arg "layout-toggle List"
46685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46704 arg "layout-toggle Description"
46712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46731 arg "depth-increment"
46739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46747 \begin_inset space ~
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 arg "depth-decrement"
46777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46783 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46785 \begin_inset space ~
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46807 arg "float-insert figure"
46815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46822 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46838 arg "float-insert table"
46846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46853 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46899 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46929 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46993 arg "nomencl-insert"
47001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47009 \begin_inset space ~
47018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47027 arg "footnote-insert"
47035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47057 arg "marginalnote-insert"
47065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47073 \begin_inset space ~
47082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47106 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 arg "box-insert Frameless"
47134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47202 \begin_inset space ~
47211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47220 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
47228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47235 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
47242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47251 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
47259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47266 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47286 arg "dialog-show character"
47294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47300 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47305 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
47312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47318 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
47323 arg "textstyle-apply"
47331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47336 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
47337 Format text using the recent settings in the
47340 arg "dialog-show character"
47349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47358 arg "layout-paragraph"
47366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47372 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47392 arg "thesaurus-entry"
47400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47420 \begin_layout Subsection
47421 View/Update Toolbar
47422 \begin_inset Index idx
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47426 Toolbar ! View / Update
47434 \begin_layout Standard
47435 \begin_inset Graphics
47436 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
47443 \begin_layout Standard
47444 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47450 \begin_layout Standard
47451 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
47455 \begin_layout Standard
47456 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47462 \begin_layout Standard
47463 \begin_inset Tabular
47464 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
47465 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47466 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47467 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47507 arg "buffer-update"
47515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47537 arg "master-buffer-view"
47545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47553 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47561 \begin_inset space ~
47570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47579 arg "master-buffer-update"
47587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47617 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
47625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47632 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47634 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
47636 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
47639 \SpecialChar menuseparator
47640 Synchronize with Output
47646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47657 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
47667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47674 View (Other Formats)
47680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47687 arg "update-others"
47691 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
47699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47706 Update (Other Formats)
47719 \begin_layout Standard
47721 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
47722 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
47728 \begin_layout Subsection
47732 \begin_layout Standard
47733 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
47734 \begin_inset space ~
47738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47740 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47744 , the table toolbar
47745 \begin_inset Index idx
47748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47762 manual and the math macro toolbar
47763 \begin_inset Index idx
47766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47779 \begin_layout Chapter
47780 The Document Settings
47781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47783 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47788 \begin_inset Index idx
47791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47792 Document ! Settings
47800 \begin_layout Standard
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47809 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
47810 is called with the menu
47812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47816 You can save your document settings as default with the
47818 Save as Document Defaults
47820 button in any dialog.
47821 This will create a template named
47825 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47826 when you create a new document without
47830 \begin_layout Standard
47835 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47836 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47839 \begin_layout Standard
47840 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47841 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
47842 to find the one you are looking for.
47843 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
47844 the submenus of the dialog.
47846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47850 \begin_inset space \space{}
47854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47861 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47862 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47863 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47866 \begin_layout Section
47870 \begin_layout Standard
47871 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
47873 Document classes are described in section
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47880 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47887 \begin_layout Standard
47891 \begin_inset space ~
47896 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47901 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47902 as a layout for a document class.
47903 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
47905 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
47914 \begin_layout Standard
47915 Some classes use special class options by default.
47916 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
47920 and you can decide to use them or not.
47921 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
47922 recommended you leave them untouched.
47927 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47928 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
47933 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47935 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
47940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47941 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47942 \begin_inset Newline newline
47947 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
47950 \begin_inset Newline newline
47953 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47954 distribution, see section
47959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47961 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47974 \begin_layout Standard
47979 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47980 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47981 in the background if the child document
47982 is opened without its master.
47983 This way child documents are always compilable.
47984 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47991 \begin_inset space ~
47999 \begin_layout Standard
48000 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48011 \begin_inset Index idx
48014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48016 packages ! prettyref
48022 \begin_inset Index idx
48025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48027 packages ! refstyle
48032 for cross-references, see section
48033 \begin_inset space ~
48037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48039 reference "sec:Cross-References"
48046 \begin_layout Section
48050 \begin_layout Standard
48051 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
48052 Please refer to the section
48055 \begin_inset space ~
48063 \begin_inset space ~
48068 manual for details.
48071 \begin_layout Section
48075 \begin_layout Standard
48076 Modules are explained in section
48077 \begin_inset space ~
48081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48083 reference "subsec:Modules"
48090 \begin_layout Section
48094 \begin_layout Standard
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48102 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
48109 \begin_layout Section
48113 \begin_layout Standard
48114 The document font settings are described in section
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48121 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
48128 \begin_layout Section
48132 \begin_layout Standard
48133 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
48145 \begin_inset space ~
48150 and whether it should be a
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48158 can also be specified here.
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48162 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
48163 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
48164 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
48166 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
48169 \begin_layout Standard
48172 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
48175 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
48176 justifies the text on screen.
48177 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
48179 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
48183 \begin_layout Standard
48185 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
48194 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
48199 \begin_layout Section
48203 \begin_layout Standard
48204 This dialog is described in sections
48205 \begin_inset space ~
48209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48211 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
48216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48218 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
48225 \begin_layout Section
48229 \begin_layout Standard
48230 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48237 reference "subsec:Margins"
48244 \begin_layout Section
48246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48248 name "sec:Language-encodings"
48253 \begin_inset Index idx
48256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48257 Language ! Encoding
48265 \begin_layout Standard
48266 The document language and quote styles are set here.
48267 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48268 (the \SpecialChar LyX
48270 is always encoded in utf8).
48271 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
48272 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
48273 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
48274 -command is not known for
48275 a particular character).
48276 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
48280 \begin_layout Standard
48282 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
48283 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48284 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
48285 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
48286 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
48287 's default encoding).
48288 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
48289 's Unicode support covers the
48290 characters of most scripts.
48291 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
48292 using one of the traditional, or
48293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48300 , encodings is necessary.
48303 \begin_layout Standard
48305 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
48307 provides support for these traditional encodings.
48310 Traditional (auto-selected)
48316 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
48317 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
48318 the given language(s).
48320 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
48324 \begin_layout Standard
48326 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
48327 If you use the option
48332 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
48335 If the document contains text in more than one language you
48336 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
48339 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48342 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
48343 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
48344 exactly one encoding.
48345 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
48350 \begin_layout Standard
48352 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
48353 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
48359 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
48360 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
48362 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
48366 \begin_layout Standard
48368 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
48369 Finally, you can also select
48373 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
48374 Note that this encoding is then used for
48379 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
48380 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
48384 \begin_layout Standard
48386 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48388 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
48392 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
48393 Do not load inputenc
48394 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48398 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
48400 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
48402 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48404 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
48405 in the next dropdown menu
48406 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48407 does what it states:
48408 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
48410 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
48412 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
48413 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
48414 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48420 \begin_inset Index idx
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48425 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
48427 packages ! inputenc
48435 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
48436 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
48437 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48438 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48439 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48441 Note that this option is only available for the standard
48447 Traditional (auto-selected)
48454 \begin_layout Standard
48456 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
48458 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
48459 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
48460 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48461 installation supports Unicode), choose
48462 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
48463 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48464 is quite incomplete, so
48465 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
48470 (when \SpecialChar LyX
48471 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48472 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
48473 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48474 -commands is not used, because all
48475 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
48476 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48477 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48478 , two new alternative engines
48479 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48481 Both engines support Unicode natively.
48483 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
48486 \begin_inset space ~
48494 \begin_inset space ~
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48508 \begin_inset space ~
48512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48514 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
48519 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
48523 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
48528 \begin_layout Standard
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48537 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48538 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
48540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48548 The possible settings are:
48551 \begin_layout Description
48552 Default uses the language package that is selected in
48554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48555 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48559 \begin_inset space ~
48563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48565 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48572 \begin_layout Description
48573 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
48574 format you will use.
48575 In many cases this will be
48580 \begin_inset Index idx
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 If the newer package
48596 \begin_inset Index idx
48599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48601 packages ! polyglossia
48606 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48607 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48608 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
48610 this package will be used instead of
48617 \begin_layout Description
48619 \begin_inset space ~
48630 would be more appropriate.
48633 \begin_layout Description
48634 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
48635 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
48639 (for German texts), type in
48642 \begin_inset Newline newline
48647 usepackage{ngerman}
48650 \begin_layout Description
48651 None will not use a language package.
48652 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
48655 \begin_layout Standard
48656 Here is a list with the important encodings:
48659 \begin_layout Description
48661 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
48663 \begin_inset space ~
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48671 \begin_inset space ~
48678 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48684 \begin_inset Index idx
48687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48689 packages ! inputenc
48695 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48696 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48697 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48703 \begin_layout Description
48704 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
48706 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
48707 commands, which may result in a big
48708 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
48709 -commands are needed.
48711 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
48712 This is the same as the
48725 \begin_layout Description
48727 \begin_inset space ~
48731 \begin_inset space ~
48734 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
48737 \begin_layout Description
48739 \begin_inset space ~
48743 \begin_inset space ~
48746 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
48749 \begin_layout Description
48751 \begin_inset space ~
48754 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
48757 \begin_layout Description
48759 \begin_inset space ~
48763 \begin_inset space ~
48766 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
48767 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
48770 \begin_layout Description
48772 \begin_inset space ~
48776 \begin_inset space ~
48779 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
48783 \begin_layout Description
48785 \begin_inset space ~
48789 \begin_inset space ~
48792 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
48793 ISO-8859-13 encoding
48796 \begin_layout Description
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48802 \begin_inset space ~
48806 \begin_inset space ~
48809 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
48810 \begin_inset space ~
48816 \begin_layout Description
48818 \begin_inset space ~
48822 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48829 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
48830 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
48833 \begin_layout Description
48835 \begin_inset space ~
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48842 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
48843 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
48844 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48845 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48846 \begin_inset space ~
48850 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_layout Description
48858 \begin_inset space ~
48862 \begin_inset space ~
48865 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
48866 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
48867 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48869 should try to use the encoding Unicode
48870 \begin_inset space ~
48874 \begin_inset space ~
48880 \begin_layout Description
48882 \begin_inset space ~
48886 \begin_inset space ~
48889 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48892 \begin_layout Description
48894 \begin_inset space ~
48898 \begin_inset space ~
48901 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48904 \begin_layout Description
48906 \begin_inset space ~
48910 \begin_inset space ~
48913 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
48916 \begin_layout Description
48918 \begin_inset space ~
48921 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48924 \begin_layout Description
48926 \begin_inset space ~
48929 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48932 \begin_layout Description
48934 \begin_inset space ~
48938 \begin_inset space ~
48941 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48944 \begin_layout Description
48946 \begin_inset space ~
48950 \begin_inset space ~
48956 \begin_layout Description
48958 \begin_inset space ~
48962 \begin_inset space ~
48965 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48968 \begin_layout Description
48970 \begin_inset space ~
48974 \begin_inset space ~
48980 \begin_layout Description
48982 \begin_inset space ~
48986 \begin_inset space ~
48989 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48995 \begin_inset Index idx
48998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 , when using this, set the document language to
49010 \begin_layout Description
49012 \begin_inset space ~
49016 \begin_inset space ~
49019 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49024 , when using this, set the document language to
49027 \begin_inset space ~
49033 \begin_layout Description
49035 \begin_inset space ~
49039 \begin_inset space ~
49042 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49048 \begin_inset Index idx
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49053 packages ! japanese
49058 , when using this, set the document language to
49063 \begin_layout Description
49065 \begin_inset space ~
49069 \begin_inset space ~
49072 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49077 , when using this, set the document language to
49082 \begin_layout Description
49084 \begin_inset space ~
49088 \begin_inset space ~
49091 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49096 , when using this, set the document language to
49101 \begin_layout Description
49103 \begin_inset space ~
49106 (EUC-KR) for Korean
49109 \begin_layout Description
49111 \begin_inset space ~
49115 \begin_inset space ~
49119 \begin_inset space ~
49122 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
49125 \begin_layout Description
49127 \begin_inset space ~
49131 \begin_inset space ~
49135 \begin_inset space ~
49138 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
49139 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
49140 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
49143 \begin_layout Description
49145 \begin_inset space ~
49149 \begin_inset space ~
49155 \begin_layout Description
49157 \begin_inset space ~
49161 \begin_inset space ~
49164 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
49165 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
49168 \begin_layout Description
49170 \begin_inset space ~
49174 \begin_inset space ~
49177 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49183 \begin_inset Index idx
49186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49193 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
49194 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
49196 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
49197 with the default encoding (
49199 Unicode (utf8) [default]
49205 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
49206 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49211 \begin_layout Description
49213 \begin_inset space ~
49221 \begin_inset space ~
49224 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
49231 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49234 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49241 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49242 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49244 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49247 \begin_layout Description
49249 \begin_inset space ~
49253 \begin_inset space ~
49256 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49262 \begin_inset Index idx
49265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49273 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
49276 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
49278 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
49279 This used to be more comprehensive than
49282 \begin_inset space ~
49287 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
49292 \begin_layout Description
49294 \begin_inset space ~
49297 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49303 \begin_inset Index idx
49306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49308 packages ! inputenc
49315 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
49316 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
49318 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
49319 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
49320 with the default encoding (
49322 Unicode (utf8) [default]
49328 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
49329 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
49334 \begin_layout Description
49336 \begin_inset space ~
49340 \begin_inset space ~
49344 \begin_inset space ~
49347 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
49348 \begin_inset space ~
49354 \begin_layout Description
49356 \begin_inset space ~
49360 \begin_inset space ~
49364 \begin_inset space ~
49367 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
49368 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
49369 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
49373 \begin_layout Description
49375 \begin_inset space ~
49379 \begin_inset space ~
49383 \begin_inset space ~
49386 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
49387 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
49390 \begin_layout Section
49392 \begin_inset Index idx
49395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 \begin_inset Index idx
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49412 \begin_inset Index idx
49415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 Color ! Shaded boxes
49422 \begin_inset Index idx
49425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49426 Color ! Greyed-out notes
49434 \begin_layout Standard
49435 Here you can alter the font color for the
49439 (default: black), for
49442 \begin_inset space ~
49447 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
49451 (default: white) and for
49454 \begin_inset space ~
49464 sets the color back to the default.
49467 \begin_layout Standard
49468 Clicking any button showing
49476 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
49477 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
49478 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
49479 later more quickly.
49482 \begin_layout Standard
49483 Note, if you change the
49486 \begin_inset space ~
49491 font color and use the option
49494 \begin_inset space ~
49499 in the document settings under
49502 \begin_inset space ~
49507 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
49508 \begin_inset space ~
49512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49514 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49521 \begin_layout Standard
49522 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
49528 \begin_layout Standard
49532 \begin_inset space ~
49541 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
49544 \begin_inset space ~
49547 Code after a forced page break:
49550 \begin_layout Itemize
49551 For the page color:
49552 \begin_inset Newline newline
49559 pagecolor{color name}
49562 \begin_layout Itemize
49563 For the text color:
49564 \begin_inset Newline newline
49574 \begin_layout Standard
49575 You are restricted to one of
49611 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
49618 \begin_inset space ~
49624 \begin_inset Newline newline
49627 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
49628 names to refer to them:
49631 \begin_layout Itemize
49637 \begin_inset Newline newline
49642 page_backgroundcolor
49645 \begin_layout Itemize
49649 \begin_inset space ~
49655 \begin_inset Newline newline
49663 \begin_layout Itemize
49667 \begin_inset space ~
49673 \begin_inset Newline newline
49681 \begin_layout Itemize
49685 \begin_inset space ~
49691 \begin_inset Newline newline
49699 \begin_layout Standard
49700 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
49703 \begin_inset space ~
49711 \begin_inset space ~
49719 \begin_layout Section
49721 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
49725 \begin_layout Standard
49727 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
49728 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
49729 \begin_inset space ~
49733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49735 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49743 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
49744 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
49747 \begin_layout Standard
49749 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49750 Additionally, you can advise
49751 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
49754 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
49756 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49757 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
49758 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
49761 \begin_layout Section
49765 \begin_layout Standard
49766 Here you can adjust the
49770 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49774 as described in section
49775 \begin_inset space ~
49779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49781 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49786 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
49790 \begin_layout Standard
49792 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
49793 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
49795 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
49796 this package can be used as well.
49797 The most common one are:
49800 \begin_layout Description
49802 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
49803 right Line numbers to the right margin
49806 \begin_layout Description
49808 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
49809 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
49813 \begin_layout Description
49815 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
49816 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
49819 \begin_layout Description
49821 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
49822 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
49825 \begin_layout Description
49827 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
49828 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
49831 \begin_layout Description
49833 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
49835 \begin_inset space ~
49838 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
49843 \begin_layout Section
49847 \begin_layout Standard
49848 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49854 \begin_inset Index idx
49857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49859 packages ! biblatex
49869 \begin_inset Index idx
49872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49884 \begin_inset Index idx
49887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49895 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49898 Sectioned bibliography
49900 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49906 \begin_inset Index idx
49909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 packages ! bibtopic
49921 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
49922 Finally, you can select a document-specific
49926 for the generation of the bibliography.
49927 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49928 \begin_inset space ~
49932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49934 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49941 \begin_layout Section
49945 \begin_layout Standard
49946 Here you can define the
49950 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49958 reference "sec:Index"
49965 \begin_layout Section
49969 \begin_layout Standard
49970 The PDF properties are explained in section
49971 \begin_inset space ~
49975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49977 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49984 \begin_layout Section
49988 \begin_layout Standard
49989 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49990 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49996 \begin_inset Index idx
49999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50011 \begin_inset Index idx
50014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50026 \begin_inset Index idx
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50041 \begin_inset Index idx
50044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50056 \begin_inset Index idx
50059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50061 packages ! mathdots
50071 \begin_inset Index idx
50074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50076 packages ! mathtools
50086 \begin_inset Index idx
50089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50101 \begin_inset Index idx
50104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50106 packages ! stackrel
50116 \begin_inset Index idx
50119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50121 packages ! stmaryrd
50131 \begin_inset Index idx
50134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50136 packages ! undertilde
50141 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
50144 \begin_layout Description
50145 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
50146 -errors in formulas,
50147 ensure that you have this enabled.
50150 \begin_layout Description
50151 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
50152 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
50153 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
50157 \begin_layout Description
50158 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
50161 \begin_inset space ~
50173 \begin_layout Description
50174 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
50177 \begin_inset space ~
50189 \begin_layout Description
50190 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
50201 \begin_layout Description
50202 mathtools is used for the math commands
50238 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
50245 \begin_layout Description
50246 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
50248 Chemical Symbols and Equations
50257 \begin_layout Description
50258 stackrel is used for the math command
50275 \begin_layout Description
50276 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
50279 \begin_layout Description
50280 undertilde is used for the math command
50288 Accents for one Character
50297 \begin_layout Section
50299 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
50301 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
50307 \begin_layout Standard
50309 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
50310 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
50313 \begin_layout Standard
50315 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
50316 The float placement options
50317 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
50320 are described in the section
50323 \begin_inset space ~
50327 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
50329 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
50337 \begin_inset space ~
50345 \begin_layout Section
50349 \begin_layout Standard
50350 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
50352 Program Code Listings
50357 \begin_inset space ~
50365 \begin_layout Section
50369 \begin_layout Standard
50370 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
50378 set to be used and set the
50383 The itemize environment is described in section
50384 \begin_inset space ~
50388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50390 reference "sec:Itemize"
50397 \begin_layout Standard
50398 You can furthermore specify a
50401 \begin_inset space ~
50406 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50407 command of the desired character.
50408 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
50415 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
50417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50421 \begin_inset space \space{}
50425 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
50435 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
50436 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
50439 \begin_layout Standard
50440 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50448 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50449 -packages in the preamble (menu
50452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50453 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50456 \begin_inset space ~
50462 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
50466 usepackage{textcomp}
50469 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
50473 usepackage{amssymb}
50483 \begin_layout Section
50487 \begin_layout Standard
50488 Branches are described in section
50489 \begin_inset space ~
50493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50495 reference "sec:Branches"
50502 \begin_layout Section
50504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50506 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
50513 \begin_layout Standard
50514 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
50517 \begin_layout Description
50519 \begin_inset space ~
50523 \begin_inset space ~
50526 Format: The format that is used when you enter
50527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50546 View Master Document
50547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50554 Update Master Document
50555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50562 menu or the toolbar.
50563 The default is set in
50565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50568 \begin_inset space ~
50571 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50575 \begin_inset space ~
50579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50581 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50588 \begin_layout Description
50590 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
50592 \begin_inset space ~
50596 \begin_inset space ~
50600 \begin_inset space ~
50603 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
50608 option which is needed with some packages.
50609 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
50610 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
50613 \begin_layout Description
50615 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
50617 \begin_inset space ~
50621 \begin_inset space ~
50624 Options offers settings for the
50632 \begin_layout Itemize
50636 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
50638 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
50640 \begin_inset space ~
50646 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
50648 \begin_inset space ~
50652 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
50658 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
50660 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
50661 settings for the menu
50663 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50667 \begin_inset space ~
50671 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
50674 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
50675 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
50680 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50682 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
50684 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50687 or a detailed description see section
50689 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50700 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
50704 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
50708 \begin_layout Itemize
50710 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
50713 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
50715 determines whether so-called
50716 \begin_inset Quotes els
50720 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50724 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
50726 \begin_inset Quotes els
50730 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50733 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
50734 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
50735 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
50737 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
50739 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
50740 macros, you can uncheck this.
50741 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
50748 \begin_layout Description
50750 \begin_inset space ~
50754 \begin_inset space ~
50757 Options offers settings for the export format
50765 \begin_inset space ~
50770 will assure that the output follows exactly version
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50774 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
50778 \begin_inset space ~
50783 settings are described in detail in section
50785 Math Output in XHTML
50790 \begin_inset space ~
50799 \begin_inset space ~
50803 \begin_inset space ~
50808 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50811 \begin_layout Description
50813 \begin_inset space ~
50818 Save transient properties
50820 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
50821 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50822 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50826 \begin_layout Itemize
50827 the activation of change tracking
50830 \begin_layout Itemize
50831 the output of tracked changes
50834 \begin_layout Itemize
50835 the recording of the document directory path.
50838 \begin_layout Standard
50839 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
50840 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50844 \begin_layout Section
50852 \begin_layout Standard
50853 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50855 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50857 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50859 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
50863 \begin_layout Standard
50864 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50865 -syntax is given in section
50866 \begin_inset space ~
50870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50879 \begin_layout Chapter
50885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50887 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50892 \begin_inset Index idx
50895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50904 \begin_layout Standard
50905 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50911 It has the following submenus.
50914 \begin_layout Section
50918 \begin_layout Subsection
50922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50923 User Interface File
50924 \begin_inset Index idx
50927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50928 Customization ! of toolbars
50934 \begin_inset Index idx
50937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50938 Customization ! of menus
50946 \begin_layout Standard
50947 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
50948 interface (ui) file.
50949 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50957 \begin_layout Description
50962 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50965 \begin_layout Description
50972 the menu entries in popup context menus
50975 \begin_layout Description
50980 specifies the toolbar buttons
50983 \begin_layout Standard
50984 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
50985 and edit the entries.
50988 \begin_layout Standard
50989 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
51001 entries must be finished with an explicit
51026 and in the case of the
51027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51039 The syntax for the entries is:
51042 \begin_layout Standard
51043 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51072 \begin_layout Standard
51074 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51077 All the \SpecialChar LyX
51078 -functions are listed in the menu
51080 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
51082 \begin_inset space ~
51090 \begin_layout Standard
51091 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51097 \begin_layout Standard
51098 For example, assuming you use the menu
51100 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51103 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
51107 \begin_layout Standard
51108 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51132 \begin_layout Standard
51134 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
51138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51149 to have the sixth bookmark.
51152 \begin_layout Standard
51156 \begin_inset space ~
51161 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
51162 's toolbar buttons.
51163 The currently available icon sets are compared in
51164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51167 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
51175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51179 \begin_layout Standard
51182 Enable tool tips in main work area
51184 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
51188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51192 \begin_layout Standard
51197 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
51198 should display in the menu
51200 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51202 \begin_inset space ~
51210 \begin_layout Subsection
51214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51218 \begin_layout Standard
51221 Restore window layouts and geometries
51224 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
51225 the last \SpecialChar LyX
51229 \begin_layout Standard
51232 Restore cursor positions
51234 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
51238 \begin_layout Standard
51241 Load opened files from last session
51243 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
51247 \begin_layout Standard
51250 Clear all session information
51252 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
51253 sessions (cursor positions, names
51254 of last opened documents, etc.).
51257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51261 name "subsec:Backup documents"
51266 \begin_inset Index idx
51269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51278 \begin_layout Standard
51281 Backup original documents when saving
51283 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
51284 it was saved the last time.
51285 It is stored in the
51288 \begin_inset space ~
51294 \begin_inset space ~
51298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51300 reference "sec:Paths"
51304 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
51307 \begin_inset space ~
51313 The backup file has the file extension
51314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51328 \begin_layout Standard
51331 Backup documents, every
51333 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
51336 \begin_layout Standard
51339 Save documents compressed by default
51341 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
51342 \begin_inset space ~
51346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51348 reference "subsec:Compressed"
51353 This applies to newly created documents only.
51354 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
51357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51358 Windows & work area
51361 \begin_layout Standard
51364 Open documents in tabs
51366 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
51370 \begin_layout Standard
51375 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
51380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51382 \begin_inset space ~
51386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51388 reference "sec:Paths"
51392 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
51399 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
51400 documents will be opened in the same running instance
51401 of \SpecialChar LyX
51403 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
51404 instance is created for each file.
51407 \begin_layout Standard
51410 Single close-tab button
51412 is checked, there will only be one close button (
51422 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
51423 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
51424 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
51428 \begin_layout Standard
51429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51437 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
51438 before the change takes effect.
51446 \begin_layout Standard
51451 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
51453 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
51455 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
51459 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
51460 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
51461 and only want to close the view in once instance.
51464 \begin_layout Subsection
51466 \begin_inset Index idx
51469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51478 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
51485 \begin_layout Standard
51486 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
51490 \begin_layout Standard
51491 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51499 This section only deals with the fonts
51503 the \SpecialChar LyX
51505 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
51508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51509 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51520 \begin_layout Standard
51521 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
51538 (depends on the system) as its
51541 \begin_inset space ~
51557 \begin_layout Standard
51558 You can change the font size with the
51565 \begin_layout Standard
51570 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
51572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51575 points have the size of 1
51576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51580 \begin_inset space ~
51584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51586 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
51591 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
51592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51596 The sizes are explained in detail in section
51597 \begin_inset space ~
51601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51603 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
51610 \begin_layout Subsection
51612 \begin_inset Index idx
51615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51616 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
51623 \begin_inset Index idx
51626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51635 \begin_layout Standard
51636 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
51637 by choosing an item in the
51638 list and selecting the
51645 \begin_layout Standard
51646 By checking the option
51650 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
51653 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
51654 \begin_inset space ~
51658 \begin_inset space ~
51663 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
51666 \begin_layout Subsection
51668 \begin_inset Index idx
51671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51680 \begin_layout Standard
51681 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51685 \begin_layout Standard
51690 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51691 This feature is described in section
51692 \begin_inset space ~
51696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51698 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51705 \begin_layout Standard
51706 Checking the option
51709 \begin_inset space ~
51713 \begin_inset space ~
51717 \begin_inset space ~
51722 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51725 \begin_layout Section
51727 \begin_inset Index idx
51730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51739 \begin_layout Subsection
51743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51747 \begin_layout Standard
51750 Cursor follows scrollbar
51752 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
51756 \begin_layout Standard
51757 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51758 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
51759 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51762 \begin_layout Standard
51765 Scroll below end of document
51767 is self-explanatory.
51770 \begin_layout Standard
51771 In \SpecialChar LyX
51772 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51779 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51781 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51782 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51783 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
51787 \begin_layout Standard
51789 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
51792 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
51794 is only relevant in documents that
51799 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
51808 markup) with this option selected.
51809 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
51811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51815 \begin_inset Quotes els
51819 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51823 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
51824 dissolving from insets.
51829 track changes, pasted text is
51834 \begin_inset Quotes els
51838 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51841 notwithstanding the state of this option.
51846 \begin_layout Standard
51849 Sort environments alphabetically
51851 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51854 \begin_layout Standard
51857 Group environments by their category
51859 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51862 \begin_layout Standard
51867 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
51876 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
51880 \begin_layout Standard
51882 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51885 Search drive for cited files
51887 allows \SpecialChar LyX
51888 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
51891 \begin_inset space ~
51895 \begin_inset space ~
51899 \begin_inset space ~
51903 \begin_inset space ~
51906 Content\SpecialChar ldots
51909 context menu on a citation.
51913 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
51915 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51918 field determines the search pattern.
51920 \begin_inset space ~
51924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51926 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
51935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51939 \begin_layout Standard
51940 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51945 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51946 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
51950 \begin_layout Subsection
51952 \begin_inset Index idx
51955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51962 \begin_inset Index idx
51965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51966 Settings ! Shortcuts
51974 \begin_layout Standard
51979 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51981 Several binding files are available, among them:
51984 \begin_layout Description
51985 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51988 \begin_layout Description
51989 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
52001 \begin_layout Description
52002 mac.bind a set of bindings for
52005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52013 \begin_layout Standard
52014 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
52019 , and binding files for special languages.
52020 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
52021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52025 \begin_inset space \space{}
52029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52037 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
52038 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
52039 will try to use the appropriate binding
52043 \begin_layout Standard
52044 Some binding files, like
52048 , only have a limited scope.
52049 When looking at the end of the file
52053 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
52056 \begin_layout Standard
52060 \begin_inset space ~
52064 \begin_inset space ~
52069 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
52070 in the selected key binding file.
52073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52077 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
52082 \begin_inset Index idx
52085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52086 Key Bindings ! Editing
52094 \begin_layout Standard
52095 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
52096 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
52097 functions and the bound shortcuts.
52098 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
52101 Show key-bindings containing
52104 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
52105 Insert there for example as keyword
52106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52113 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
52114 functions that contain
52115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52123 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
52124 All \SpecialChar LyX
52125 functions are also listed in the file
52130 that you will find in the
52137 \begin_layout Standard
52138 For example, to add the shortcut
52146 , select the function and press the
52151 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
52152 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
52155 \begin_layout Standard
52156 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
52157 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
52162 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
52164 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
52169 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
52172 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
52176 \begin_layout Standard
52177 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
52180 \begin_layout Standard
52181 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
52183 The syntax of the entries is:
52186 \begin_layout Standard
52192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52211 \begin_layout Standard
52212 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
52213 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
52214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52241 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
52242 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
52243 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
52244 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
52246 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
52250 , you needed to specify it as
52255 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
52258 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
52261 \begin_layout Subsection
52263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52265 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
52270 \begin_inset Index idx
52273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52280 \begin_inset Index idx
52283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52284 Settings ! Keyboard Map
52292 \begin_layout Standard
52293 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
52294 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
52295 provides keyboard maps.
52296 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
52297 is a Romanian one, you can enable
52300 \begin_inset space ~
52304 \begin_inset space ~
52309 and select the keyboard map file named
52316 \begin_layout Standard
52325 keyboard map and, if you use the
52329 bindings, you can select the first and second with
52332 arg "keymap-primary"
52338 arg "keymap-secondary"
52341 respectively or toggle between them with
52344 arg "keymap-toggle"
52350 \begin_layout Standard
52351 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52359 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
52368 \begin_layout Standard
52369 You can also specify the mouse
52371 Wheel scrolling speed
52374 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
52378 Middle mouse button pasting
52380 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
52381 inserts the content of the clipboard.
52384 \begin_layout Standard
52392 \begin_inset space ~
52396 \begin_inset space ~
52401 you can select a key for zooming.
52402 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
52405 \begin_layout Subsection
52409 \begin_layout Standard
52410 Input completion is described in section
52411 \begin_inset space ~
52415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52417 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
52424 \begin_layout Section
52426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52433 \begin_inset Index idx
52436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52443 \begin_inset Index idx
52446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52455 \begin_layout Standard
52456 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
52457 are normally determined during
52459 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
52462 \begin_layout Description
52464 \begin_inset space ~
52467 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
52468 's working directory.
52469 It is the default when you
52480 \begin_inset space ~
52488 \begin_layout Description
52490 \begin_inset space ~
52493 templates This directory
52494 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
52495 contains the templates that are shown
52496 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
52497 will be opened when you use the menu
52498 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
52503 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52505 \begin_inset space ~
52509 \begin_inset space ~
52517 \begin_layout Description
52519 \begin_inset space ~
52522 files This directory
52523 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
52524 will be opened when you use the
52525 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
52526 contains the example files that are listed in
52529 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
52538 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52540 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
52542 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
52548 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
52550 \begin_inset Newline newline
52554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52566 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
52567 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
52577 \begin_layout Description
52579 \begin_inset space ~
52583 \begin_inset Index idx
52586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52592 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
52593 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
52594 \begin_inset space ~
52598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52600 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52608 will be used to save the backups.
52609 \begin_inset Newline newline
52612 Backup files have the ending
52613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52623 \begin_layout Description
52625 \begin_inset space ~
52628 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
52629 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
52631 \begin_inset Newline newline
52638 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52644 You can edit this file with the program
52653 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
52654 in its preferences under
52657 \begin_inset space ~
52663 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
52668 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
52670 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
52671 in your \SpecialChar LyX
52677 and \SpecialChar LyX
52678 need to be running the same time.
52679 \begin_inset Newline newline
52682 The pipe is also used for the
52686 feature, see section
52687 \begin_inset space ~
52691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52693 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52698 \begin_inset Newline newline
52701 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52702 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
52703 \begin_inset Newline newline
52719 \begin_layout Description
52721 \begin_inset space ~
52724 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52727 \begin_layout Description
52729 \begin_inset space ~
52732 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52733 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
52734 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52737 \begin_layout Description
52739 \begin_inset space ~
52742 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52748 You only need to specify it if you are using
52752 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
52754 For \SpecialChar LyX
52759 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
52763 \begin_layout Description
52765 \begin_inset space ~
52768 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52769 When \SpecialChar LyX
52770 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
52771 to find it on the system.
52772 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52774 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
52776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52783 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
52784 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52787 \begin_layout Description
52789 \begin_inset space ~
52792 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
52793 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52794 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52795 code or in the document
52797 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
52799 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
52800 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52801 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
52802 scanned for the input files.
52803 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
52804 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52806 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
52807 compilation may fail for some documents.
52810 \begin_layout Section
52814 \begin_layout Standard
52815 Here you can insert your
52824 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
52826 \begin_inset space ~
52830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52832 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52836 , to mark changes you make as yours.
52839 \begin_layout Section
52841 \begin_inset Index idx
52844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52845 Language ! Settings
52851 \begin_inset Index idx
52854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52855 Settings ! Language
52863 \begin_layout Subsection
52865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52867 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52874 \begin_layout Description
52876 \begin_inset space ~
52880 \begin_inset space ~
52883 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52885 You can find its actual translation status here:
52886 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52888 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52894 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
52898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52900 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
52901 LaTeX Language Support
52906 \begin_layout Description
52908 \begin_inset space ~
52911 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52912 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52913 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
52914 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52931 The most widespread language package is
52936 \begin_inset Index idx
52939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52946 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52948 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52949 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52950 come with the alternative
52956 \begin_inset Index idx
52959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 packages ! polyglossia
52966 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52967 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
52973 The available selections are described in section
52974 \begin_inset space ~
52978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52980 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52987 \begin_layout Description
52989 \begin_inset space ~
52993 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
52994 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52995 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52997 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
53001 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
53005 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
53007 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
53011 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
53012 that is used to switch to a different language
53013 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
53014 to start the package
53018 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
53019 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
53023 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
53024 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
53027 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
53031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
53039 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
53047 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
53050 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
53052 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
53056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
53074 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53075 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
53082 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
53083 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53088 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
53093 , this setting is ignored.
53098 \begin_layout Description
53100 \begin_inset space ~
53104 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
53111 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
53112 Use this if the language switch set in
53116 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
53120 's alternative command
53124 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
53125 \SpecialChar allowbreak
53128 end{otherlanguage*}
53132 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
53133 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
53134 command toggles the package on and off
53135 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
53136 Empty by default, as
53140 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53142 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
53147 selectlanguage{$$lang}
53153 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
53158 , this setting is ignored.
53163 \begin_layout Description
53165 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
53167 \begin_inset space ~
53171 \begin_inset space ~
53174 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
53178 \begin_layout Description
53180 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
53182 \begin_inset space ~
53186 \begin_inset space ~
53189 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53195 \begin_layout Description
53197 \begin_inset space ~
53201 \begin_inset space ~
53205 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
53207 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
53210 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
53211 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
53214 to the document class options
53215 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
53216 rather than the language package options.
53217 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
53221 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
53222 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
53224 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
53225 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
53227 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
53232 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
53233 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
53242 \begin_layout Description
53244 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
53246 \begin_inset space ~
53250 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
53252 \begin_inset space ~
53256 \begin_inset space ~
53260 \begin_inset space ~
53266 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
53268 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
53271 this option is set,
53272 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
53273 the language switch defined in
53276 \begin_inset space ~
53281 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
53282 to the document language.
53283 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
53284 This might be needed if you use a non-default
53287 \begin_inset space ~
53292 or if a package resets the document language.
53293 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
53294 usually should be the document language).
53295 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
53296 documents start with the chosen document language.
53297 When this option is not set, the
53300 \begin_inset space ~
53305 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53307 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
53310 \begin_inset space ~
53320 \begin_layout Description
53322 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
53324 \begin_inset space ~
53328 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
53330 \begin_inset space ~
53334 \begin_inset space ~
53338 \begin_inset space ~
53344 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
53348 \begin_inset space ~
53352 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
53353 Set document language explicitly
53359 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
53361 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
53367 \begin_inset space ~
53373 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
53375 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
53379 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
53381 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
53384 the end of the document.
53385 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
53389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53390 \paragraph_spacing single
53392 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
53398 \begin_layout Description
53400 \begin_inset space ~
53404 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
53406 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
53410 \begin_inset space ~
53414 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
53416 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
53418 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
53422 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
53425 in a language different
53426 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
53428 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
53431 the document language will be
53432 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
53433 marked (by default with a blue
53436 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
53438 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
53442 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
53446 \begin_layout Description
53448 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
53450 \begin_inset space ~
53454 \begin_inset space ~
53458 \begin_inset space ~
53461 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
53462 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
53463 switched via the operating system.
53464 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
53466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53469 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
53470 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
53475 \begin_layout Description
53477 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
53479 \begin_inset space ~
53483 \begin_inset space ~
53486 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
53487 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
53492 \begin_layout Description
53494 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53496 \begin_inset space ~
53500 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
53502 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53506 \begin_inset space ~
53510 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
53511 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
53512 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
53514 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
53518 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
53520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
53521 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
53523 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53524 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
53525 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
53527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
53532 \begin_layout Standard
53537 means that the cursor
53538 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
53539 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
53540 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
53542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53545 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
53546 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
53550 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
53552 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
53553 specific case always means: move
53557 in text (even if this means:
53563 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53564 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
53565 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
53566 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
53567 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
53568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53579 \begin_layout Standard
53581 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
53586 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
53587 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
53588 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
53592 ) when coming from the left.
53593 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
53595 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53596 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
53597 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
53602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53604 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
53608 \begin_layout Description
53610 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
53612 \begin_inset space ~
53616 \begin_inset space ~
53619 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
53620 separator alignment).
53621 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
53623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53626 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
53627 (static) custom character here.
53630 \begin_layout Description
53632 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
53634 \begin_inset space ~
53638 \begin_inset space ~
53641 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53647 \begin_layout Subsection
53651 \begin_layout Standard
53652 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
53653 \begin_inset space ~
53657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53659 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
53666 \begin_layout Section
53670 \begin_layout Subsection
53672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53674 name "subsec:General-output"
53681 \begin_layout Description
53683 \begin_inset space ~
53686 search Commands that will be used for the menu
53688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53690 \begin_inset space ~
53696 For a detailed description see section
53698 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53703 \begin_inset space ~
53711 \begin_layout Description
53713 \begin_inset space ~
53716 Options Options for the program
53720 that is used for the export format
53725 \begin_inset space ~
53729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53731 reference "subsec:Export"
53736 Possible options are listed in the
53741 \begin_inset Newline newline
53745 \begin_inset Flex URL
53748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53750 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
53760 \begin_layout Description
53762 \begin_inset space ~
53766 \begin_inset space ~
53769 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
53772 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53773 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
53775 \begin_inset space ~
53781 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
53784 \begin_layout Description
53786 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
53788 \begin_inset space ~
53792 \begin_inset Index idx
53795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53802 \begin_inset Index idx
53805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53806 Settings ! Date format
53811 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
53812 \begin_inset Newline newline
53816 \begin_inset Flex URL
53819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53821 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
53827 \begin_inset Newline newline
53830 For example the format
53831 \begin_inset Newline newline
53835 \begin_inset Newline newline
53838 prints the date as day/month/year.
53843 \begin_layout Description
53845 \begin_inset space ~
53849 \begin_inset space ~
53852 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
53853 is allowed to overwrite on export.
53856 \begin_layout Subsection
53862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53864 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
53869 \begin_inset Index idx
53872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53873 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
53882 \begin_layout Description
53884 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
53886 \begin_inset space ~
53894 \begin_inset space ~
53898 \begin_inset space ~
53901 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
53906 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
53927 are used for Cyrillic.
53928 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
53929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53941 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
53943 sets up in the background.
53944 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
53949 \begin_layout Description
53951 \begin_inset space ~
53955 \begin_inset space ~
53959 \begin_inset space ~
53963 \begin_inset space ~
53966 options They only have an effect when the program
53970 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
53973 \begin_layout Standard
53974 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
53975 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
53976 manuals of the applications.
53979 \begin_layout Description
53981 \begin_inset space ~
53984 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
53985 \begin_inset space ~
53989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53991 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
53998 \begin_layout Description
54000 \begin_inset space ~
54003 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
54004 \begin_inset space ~
54008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54010 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
54017 \begin_layout Description
54019 \begin_inset space ~
54022 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
54023 \begin_inset space ~
54027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54029 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
54036 \begin_layout Description
54042 \begin_inset space ~
54045 command Command for the program
54047 Check\SpecialChar TeX
54050 that is described in the section
54052 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
54057 Additional Features
54062 \begin_layout Standard
54063 There are additionally the following options:
54066 \begin_layout Description
54068 \begin_inset space ~
54072 \begin_inset space ~
54076 \begin_inset space ~
54080 \begin_inset space ~
54085 \begin_inset space ~
54088 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
54089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54106 to separate folders.
54107 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
54109 \begin_inset Index idx
54112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54119 \begin_inset Index idx
54122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54131 \begin_layout Description
54133 \begin_inset space ~
54137 \begin_inset space ~
54141 \begin_inset space ~
54145 \begin_inset space ~
54149 \begin_inset space ~
54153 \begin_inset space ~
54156 changes Removes all manually set
54162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54163 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54165 \begin_inset space ~
54170 dialog when changing the document class.
54173 \begin_layout Section
54175 \begin_inset space ~
54179 \begin_inset Index idx
54182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54191 \begin_layout Subsection
54193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54195 name "subsec:Converters"
54200 \begin_inset Index idx
54203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54212 \begin_layout Standard
54213 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
54214 from one format to another.
54215 You can modify converters or create new ones.
54216 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
54223 \begin_inset space ~
54228 field and press the
54233 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
54237 \begin_inset space ~
54242 drop-down list, modify the
54246 field and press the
54253 \begin_layout Standard
54256 Converter File Cache
54262 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
54264 Maximum Age (in days
54267 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
54268 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
54271 \begin_layout Standard
54272 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
54273 definition, is described in the section
54284 \begin_layout Subsection
54286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54288 name "sec:File-Formats"
54293 \begin_inset Index idx
54296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54303 \begin_inset Index idx
54306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54315 \begin_layout Standard
54316 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
54326 programs that should be used for certain formats.
54329 \begin_layout Standard
54330 You can also define the
54332 Default output format
54334 that is used when you use
54336 View, Update, View Master Document
54340 Update Master Document
54346 menu or the toolbar.
54349 \begin_layout Standard
54350 More about formats and their options is described in the section
54361 \begin_layout Standard
54362 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
54364 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
54365 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
54366 This is done by specifying a
54371 More about this is described in the section
54382 \begin_layout Chapter
54383 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
54385 \begin_inset Index idx
54388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54397 name "chap:Units-available-in"
54404 \begin_layout Standard
54406 \begin_inset space ~
54410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54412 reference "tab:Units"
54416 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
54417 and used in this documentation.
54420 \begin_layout Standard
54421 \begin_inset Float table
54428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54429 \begin_inset Caption Standard
54431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
54453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54455 \begin_inset Tabular
54456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
54457 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
54458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54459 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
54460 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54613 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
54617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54884 scaled point (65536
54885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54952 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
54957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55076 % of original image width
55081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
55135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
55144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55165 \begin_layout Standard
55166 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55169 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
55176 \begin_layout Bibliography
55177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55178 LatexCommand bibitem
55185 The \SpecialChar LyX
55187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55190 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
55196 \begin_inset Newline newline
55200 \begin_inset Flex URL
55203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55205 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
55213 \begin_layout Bibliography
55214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55215 LatexCommand bibitem
55216 key "latexcompanion"
55221 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
55223 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
55224 Companion Second Edition.
55227 Addison-Wesley, 2004
55230 \begin_layout Bibliography
55231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55232 LatexCommand bibitem
55238 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
55241 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
55245 Addison-Wesley, 2003
55248 \begin_layout Bibliography
55249 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55250 LatexCommand bibitem
55259 : A Document Preparation System.
55262 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
55265 \begin_layout Bibliography
55266 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55267 LatexCommand bibitem
55277 The \SpecialChar TeX
55281 Addison-Wesley, 1984
55284 \begin_layout Bibliography
55285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55286 LatexCommand bibitem
55292 The \SpecialChar TeX
55294 \begin_inset Newline newline
55298 \begin_inset Flex URL
55301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55303 https://ctan.org/topic
55311 \begin_layout Bibliography
55312 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55313 LatexCommand bibitem
55319 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
55321 \begin_inset Newline newline
55325 \begin_inset Flex URL
55328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55330 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
55338 \begin_layout Bibliography
55339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55340 LatexCommand bibitem
55347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55349 name "Documentation"
55350 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
55357 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55361 \begin_inset Newline newline
55365 \begin_inset Flex URL
55368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55370 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
55378 \begin_layout Bibliography
55379 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55380 LatexCommand bibitem
55387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55389 name "Documentation"
55390 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
55395 how to use the program
55397 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55401 \begin_inset Newline newline
55405 \begin_inset Flex URL
55408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55410 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
55418 \begin_layout Bibliography
55419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55420 LatexCommand bibitem
55427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55429 name "Documentation"
55430 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
55435 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55441 \begin_inset Index idx
55444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55446 packages ! biblatex
55452 \begin_inset Newline newline
55456 \begin_inset Flex URL
55459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55461 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
55469 \begin_layout Bibliography
55470 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55471 LatexCommand bibitem
55478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55480 name "Documentation"
55481 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
55486 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55492 \begin_inset Index idx
55495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55503 \begin_inset Newline newline
55507 \begin_inset Flex URL
55510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55512 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
55520 \begin_layout Bibliography
55521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55522 LatexCommand bibitem
55529 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55531 name "Documentation"
55532 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
55542 \begin_inset Newline newline
55546 \begin_inset Flex URL
55549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55551 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
55559 \begin_layout Bibliography
55560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55561 LatexCommand bibitem
55562 key "makeindex-man"
55568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55571 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
55581 \begin_inset Newline newline
55585 \begin_inset Flex URL
55588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55590 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
55598 \begin_layout Bibliography
55599 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55600 LatexCommand bibitem
55607 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55609 name "Documentation"
55610 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
55620 \begin_inset Newline newline
55624 \begin_inset Flex URL
55627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55629 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
55637 \begin_layout Bibliography
55638 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55639 LatexCommand bibitem
55646 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55648 name "Documentation"
55649 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
55654 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
55656 \begin_inset Newline newline
55660 \begin_inset Flex URL
55663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55665 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
55673 \begin_layout Bibliography
55674 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55675 LatexCommand bibitem
55682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55684 name "Documentation"
55685 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
55690 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55696 \begin_inset Index idx
55699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55707 \begin_inset Newline newline
55711 \begin_inset Flex URL
55714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55716 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
55724 \begin_layout Bibliography
55725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55726 LatexCommand bibitem
55733 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55735 name "Documentation"
55736 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
55741 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55747 \begin_inset Index idx
55750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55752 packages ! enumitem
55758 \begin_inset Newline newline
55762 \begin_inset Flex URL
55765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55767 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
55775 \begin_layout Bibliography
55776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55777 LatexCommand bibitem
55784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55786 name "Documentation"
55787 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
55792 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55798 \begin_inset Index idx
55801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55803 packages ! fancyhdr
55809 \begin_inset Newline newline
55813 \begin_inset Flex URL
55816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55818 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
55826 \begin_layout Bibliography
55827 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55828 LatexCommand bibitem
55835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55837 name "Documentation"
55838 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
55843 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55849 \begin_inset Index idx
55852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55854 packages ! hyperref
55860 \begin_inset Newline newline
55864 \begin_inset Flex URL
55867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55869 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
55877 \begin_layout Bibliography
55878 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55879 LatexCommand bibitem
55886 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55888 name "Documentation"
55889 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
55894 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55900 \begin_inset Index idx
55903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55905 packages ! microtype
55911 \begin_inset Newline newline
55915 \begin_inset Flex URL
55918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55920 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
55928 \begin_layout Bibliography
55929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55930 LatexCommand bibitem
55937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55939 name "Documentation"
55940 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
55945 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55951 \begin_inset Index idx
55954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55962 \begin_inset Newline newline
55966 \begin_inset Flex URL
55969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55971 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
55979 \begin_layout Bibliography
55980 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55981 LatexCommand bibitem
55988 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55990 name "Documentation"
55991 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
55996 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56002 \begin_inset Index idx
56005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56007 packages ! prettyref
56013 \begin_inset Newline newline
56017 \begin_inset Flex URL
56020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56022 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
56030 \begin_layout Bibliography
56031 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56032 LatexCommand bibitem
56039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56041 name "Documentation"
56042 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
56047 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56053 \begin_inset Index idx
56056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56058 packages ! refstyle
56064 \begin_inset Newline newline
56068 \begin_inset Flex URL
56071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56073 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
56081 \begin_layout Bibliography
56082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56083 LatexCommand bibitem
56090 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56093 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
56098 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56100 \begin_inset Newline newline
56104 \begin_inset Flex URL
56107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56109 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
56117 \begin_layout Bibliography
56118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56119 LatexCommand bibitem
56126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56129 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
56134 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56136 \begin_inset Newline newline
56140 \begin_inset Flex URL
56143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56145 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
56153 \begin_layout Bibliography
56154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56155 LatexCommand bibitem
56162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56165 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
56170 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56171 for Cyrillic languages:
56172 \begin_inset Newline newline
56176 \begin_inset Flex URL
56179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56181 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
56189 \begin_layout Bibliography
56190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56191 LatexCommand bibitem
56198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56201 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
56206 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56208 \begin_inset Newline newline
56212 \begin_inset Flex URL
56215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56217 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
56225 \begin_layout Bibliography
56226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56227 LatexCommand bibitem
56234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56237 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
56242 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56244 \begin_inset Newline newline
56248 \begin_inset Flex URL
56251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56253 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
56261 \begin_layout Bibliography
56262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56263 LatexCommand bibitem
56270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56273 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
56278 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
56280 \begin_inset Newline newline
56284 \begin_inset Flex URL
56287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56289 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
56297 \begin_layout Standard
56298 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56332 \begin_inset Note Note
56335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56342 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
56343 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
56344 bibliography is the second one:
56352 \begin_layout Standard
56353 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
56354 LatexCommand bibtex
56355 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
56356 options "biblio/alphadin"
56363 \begin_layout Standard
56364 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56368 \begin_layout Standard
56372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56378 pagedeclaration}[1]{
56381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56387 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
56395 \begin_inset Note Note
56398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56399 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
56400 \begin_inset space ~
56404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56406 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
56418 \begin_layout Standard
56419 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
56420 LatexCommand printnomenclature
56426 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
56427 LatexCommand printindex